212
Relion ® 615 series Feeder Protection and Control REF615 Application Manual

FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Relion® 615 series

Feeder Protection and ControlREF615Application Manual

Page 2: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk
Page 3: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Document ID: 1MRS756378Issued: 2012-05-11

Revision: KProduct version: 4.0

© Copyright 2012 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 4: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

CopyrightThis document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without writtenpermission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a thirdparty, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a licenseand may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of suchlicense.

TrademarksABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand orproduct names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registeredtrademarks of their respective holders.

WarrantyPlease inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation

Page 5: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

DisclaimerThe data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the conceptor product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteedproperties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in thismanual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable andacceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirementsare complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including butnot limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of theperson or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are herebyrequested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot becompletely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requestedto notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, inno event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting fromthe use of this manual or the application of the equipment.

Page 6: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

ConformityThis product complies with the directive of the Council of the EuropeanCommunities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating toelectromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerningelectrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB inaccordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMCdirective, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the lowvoltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the internationalstandards of the IEC 60255 series.

Page 7: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................5This manual........................................................................................5Intended audience..............................................................................5Product documentation.......................................................................5

Product documentation set............................................................5Document revision history.............................................................6Related documentation..................................................................7

Symbols and conventions...................................................................7Symbols.........................................................................................7Document conventions..................................................................8Functions, codes and symbols......................................................8

Section 2 REF615 overview...........................................................11Overview...........................................................................................11

Product version history................................................................12PCM600 and IED connectivity package version..........................12

Operation functionality......................................................................13Optional functions........................................................................13

Physical hardware............................................................................13Local HMI.........................................................................................16

Display.........................................................................................16LEDs............................................................................................17Keypad........................................................................................17

Web HMI...........................................................................................18Authorization.....................................................................................19

Audit trail......................................................................................20Communication.................................................................................22

Section 3 REF615 standard configurations....................................25Standard configurations....................................................................25

Addition of control functions for primary devices and theuse of binary inputs and outputs..................................................28

Connection diagrams........................................................................30Presentation of standard configurations...........................................36Standard configuration A..................................................................37

Applications.................................................................................37Functions.....................................................................................37

Default I/O connections..........................................................38Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................39

Functional diagrams....................................................................40

Table of contents

REF615 1Application Manual

Page 8: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Functional diagrams for protection.........................................40Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision...................................................................47Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................48

Standard configuration B..................................................................51Applications.................................................................................51Functions.....................................................................................51

Default I/O connections..........................................................53Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................54

Functional diagrams....................................................................54Functional diagrams for protection.........................................55Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision...................................................................62Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................63

Standard configuration C..................................................................67Applications.................................................................................67Functions.....................................................................................67

Default I/O connections..........................................................68Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................69

Functional diagrams....................................................................70Functional diagrams for protection.........................................70Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision...................................................................75Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................76

Standard configuration D..................................................................78Applications.................................................................................78Functions.....................................................................................79

Default I/O connections..........................................................80Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................81

Functional diagrams....................................................................82Functional diagrams for protection.........................................82Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision...................................................................88Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................89

Standard configuration E..................................................................93Applications.................................................................................93Functions.....................................................................................93

Default I/O connections..........................................................95Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................96

Functional diagrams....................................................................97Functional diagrams for protection.........................................97Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision.................................................................104Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................106

Table of contents

2 REF615Application Manual

Page 9: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Standard configuration F................................................................110Applications...............................................................................110Functions...................................................................................110

Default I/O connections........................................................113Default disturbance recorder settings...................................114

Functional diagrams..................................................................114Functional diagrams for protection.......................................115Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision.................................................................123Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................125

Standard configuration G................................................................129Applications...............................................................................129Functions...................................................................................129

Default I/O connections .......................................................131Default disturbance recorder settings...................................133Sensor settings.....................................................................133

Functional diagrams .................................................................134Functional diagrams for protection ......................................135Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision.................................................................143Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................145

Standard configuration H................................................................149Applications...............................................................................149Functions...................................................................................149

Default I/O connections........................................................151Default disturbance recorder settings...................................152

Functional diagrams..................................................................153Functional diagrams for protection.......................................153Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision.................................................................161Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................163

Standard configuration J.................................................................168Applications...............................................................................168Functions...................................................................................168

Default I/O connections........................................................171Default disturbance recorder settings...................................172

Functional diagrams..................................................................173Functional diagrams for protection.......................................173Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and tripcircuit supervision.................................................................181Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................183Functional diagrams for power quality..................................187

Section 4 Requirements for measurement transformers..............189

Table of contents

REF615 3Application Manual

Page 10: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Current transformers......................................................................189Current transformer requirements for non-directionalovercurrent protection................................................................189

Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limitfactor....................................................................................189Non-directional overcurrent protection.................................190Example for non-directional overcurrent protection..............191

Section 5 IED physical connections.............................................193Inputs..............................................................................................193

Energizing inputs.......................................................................193Phase currents.....................................................................193Residual current...................................................................193Phase voltages.....................................................................193Residual voltage...................................................................194Sensor inputs.......................................................................194

Auxiliary supply voltage input....................................................194Binary inputs..............................................................................194Optional light sensor inputs.......................................................196

Outputs...........................................................................................197Outputs for tripping and controlling............................................197Outputs for signalling.................................................................197IRF.............................................................................................199

Section 6 Glossary.......................................................................201

Table of contents

4 REF615Application Manual

Page 11: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelinessorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purposea typical protection function can be used. The manual can also be used whencalculating settings.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible forplanning, pre-engineering and engineering.

The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical powerengineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemesand principles.

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation setThe application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelinessorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purposea typical protection function can be used. The manual can also be used whencalculating settings.

The communication protocol manual describes a communication protocolsupported by the IED. The manual concentrates on vendor-specific implementations.

The engineering guide provides information for IEC 61850 engineering of the 615series protection IEDs with PCM600 and IET600. This guide concentratesespecially on the configuration of GOOSE communication with these tools. Theguide can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. For more detailson tool usage, see the PCM600 documentation.

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs usingthe different tools in PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to set up aPCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also

1MRS756378 K Section 1Introduction

REF615 5Application Manual

Page 12: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

recommends a sequence for engineering of protection and control functions, LHMIfunctions as well as communication engineering for IEC 61850 and othersupported protocols.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. Themanual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chaptersare organized in chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it hasbeen commissioned. The manual provides instructions for monitoring, controllingand setting the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances andhow to view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of afault.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data pointsspecific to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with thecorresponding communication protocol manual.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and listsfunction blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters andtechnical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical referenceduring the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and duringnormal service.

1.3.2 Document revision historyDocument revision/date Product version HistoryA/2007-12-20 1.0 First release

B/2008-02-08 1.0 Content updated

C/2008-07-02 1.1 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

D/2009-03-04 2.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

E/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated

F/2010-06-11 3.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

G/2010-06-29 3.0 Terminology updated

H/2010-09-24 3.0 Content updated

K/2012-05-11 4.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

Download the latest documents from the ABB Web sitehttp://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

Section 1 1MRS756378 KIntroduction

6 REF615Application Manual

Page 13: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

1.3.3 Related documentationName of the document Document IDModbus Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756468

DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756709

IEC 60870-5-103 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756710

IEC 61850 Engineering Guide 1MRS756475

Engineering Manual 1MRS757121

Installation Manual 1MRS756375

Operation Manual 1MRS756708

Technical Manual 1MRS756887

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazardwhich could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which couldresult in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning relatedto the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presenceof a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damageto equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts andconditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design yourproject or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary tounderstand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damagedequipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injuryor death. Therefore, comply fully with all warning and caution notices.

1MRS756378 K Section 1Introduction

REF615 7Application Manual

Page 14: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

1.4.2 Document conventionsA particular convention may not be used in this manual.

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. Theglossary also contains definitions of important terms.

• Push-button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using thepush-button icons.To navigate between the options, use and .

• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.Select Main menu/Settings.

• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .

• Parameter names are shown in italics.The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.

• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

• IED input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.

1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbolsTable 1: REF615 functions, codes and symbols

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage

PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)

PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Three-phase directional overcurrentprotection, low stage

DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)

DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)

Three-phase directional overcurrentprotection, high stage DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> 67-2

Non-directional earth-fault protection, low stage EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)

EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, highstage EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection,instantaneous stage EFIPTOC1 Io>>> 50N/51N

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)

DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> 67N-2

Table continues on next page

Section 1 1MRS756378 KIntroduction

8 REF615Application Manual

Page 15: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIAdmittance based earth-fault protection EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)

EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)

EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)

WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)

WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)

Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF 67NIEF

Harmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA 51NHA

Non-directional (cross-country) earth faultprotection, using calculated Io EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)

PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)

PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)

Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)

PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)

PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)

Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)

Frequency protection FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81 (1)

FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81 (2)

FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81 (3)

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Master trip TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Power quality

Current total demand distortion CMHAI1 PQM3I (1) PQM3I (1)

Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI1 PQM3U (1) PQM3V (1)

Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU (1) PQMV (1)

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 1Introduction

REF615 9Application Manual

Page 16: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIControl

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Disconnector control DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC (1) I <-> O DCC (1)

DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC (2) I <-> O DCC (2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC

Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN1 SYNC 25

Condition monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM

Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Current circuit supervision CCRDIF1 MCS 3I MCS 3I

Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 FUSEF 60

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 Io In

Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U 3U

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo Vn

Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0

Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 P, E P, E

Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f f

Section 1 1MRS756378 KIntroduction

10 REF615Application Manual

Page 17: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Section 2 REF615 overview

2.1 Overview

REF615 is a dedicated feeder IED (intelligent electronic device) designed for theprotection, control, measurement and supervision of utility substations andindustrial power systems including radial, looped and meshed distribution networkswith or without distributed power generation. REF615 is a member of ABB’sRelion® product family and part of its 615 protection and control product series.The 615 series IEDs are characterized by their compactness and withdrawable-unitdesign.

Re-engineered from the ground up, the 615 series has been designed to unleash thefull potential of the IEC 61850 standard for communication and interoperabilitybetween substation automation devices.

The IED provides main protection for overhead lines and cable feeders indistribution networks. The IED is also used as back-up protection in applications,where an independent and redundant protection system is required.

Depending on the chosen standard configuration, the IED is adapted for theprotection of overhead line and cable feeders in isolated neutral, resistance earthed,compensated and solidly earthed networks. Once the standard configuration IEDhas been given the application-specific settings, it can directly be put into service.

The 615 series IEDs support a range of communication protocols including IEC61850 with GOOSE messaging, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus® and DNP3.

1MRS756378 K Section 2REF615 overview

REF615 11Application Manual

Page 18: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

2.1.1 Product version historyProduct version Product history1.0 Product released

1.1 • IRIG-B• Support for parallel protocols added: IEC 61850 and Modbus• X130 BIO added: optional for variants B and D• CB interlocking functionality enhanced• TCS functionality in HW enhanced• Non-volatile memory added

2.0 • Support for DNP3 serial or TCP/IP• Support for IEC 60870-5-103• Voltage measurement and protection• Power and energy measurement• New standard configurations E and F• Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI• Fuse failure supervision

3.0 • New configurations G and H• Additions to configurations A, B, E and F• Application configurability support• Analog GOOSE support• Large display with single line diagram• Enhanced mechanical design• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records• Admittance-based earth-fault protection• Frequency measurement and protection• Synchronism and energizing check• Combi sensor inputs• Multi-port Ethernet option

4.0 • New configuration J• Additions/changes for configurations A-H• Dual fibre optic Ethernet communication option (COM0032)• Generic control point (SPCGGIO) function blocks• Additional logic blocks• Button object for SLD• Controllable disconnector and earth switch objects for SLD• Wattmetric based E/F• Harmonics based E/F• Power Quality functions• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records

2.1.2 PCM600 and IED connectivity package version• Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 Ver. 2.4 SP1 or later• REF615 Connectivity Package Ver. 4.0 or later

• Parameter Setting• Firmware Update• Disturbance Handling• Signal Monitoring• Lifecycle Traceability• Signal Matrix• Communication Management• Configuration Wizard

Section 2 1MRS756378 KREF615 overview

12 REF615Application Manual

Page 19: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

• Label Printing• IED User Management• Application Configuration• Graphical Display Editor• Event Viewer

Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation

2.2 Operation functionality

2.2.1 Optional functions• Arc protection• Autoreclosing• Modbus TCP/IP or RTU/ASCII• IEC 60870-5-103• DNP3 TCP/IP or serial• Admittance based earth-fault (configuration A, B, E, F, G and J only)• Watt-metric based earth-fault (configuration A, B, E, F, G and J only)• Harmonics based earth-fault (configuration B, D, F and J only)• Power quality functions (configuration J only)

2.3 Physical hardware

The IED consists of two main parts: plug-in unit and case. The content depends onthe ordered functionality.

1MRS756378 K Section 2REF615 overview

REF615 13Application Manual

Page 20: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 2: Plug-in unit and case

Main unit Slot ID Content optionsPlug-inunit

- HMI Small (4 lines, 16 characters)Large (8 lines, 16 characters)

X100 Auxiliary power/BOmodule

48-250 V DC/100-240 V AC; or 24-60 V DC2 normally-open PO contacts1 change-over SO contacts1 normally-open SO contact2 double-pole PO contacts with TCS1 dedicated internal fault output contact

X110 BI/O module Only with configurations B, D, E, F, G, H and J:8 binary inputs4 SO contacts

X120 AI/BI module Only with configurations A and B:3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)

1 residual voltage input (60-120 V)3 binary inputs

Only with configurations C, D, E, F, H and J:3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)

4 binary inputs

Case X130 AI/BI module Only with configurations E and F:3 phase voltage inputs (60-120 V)1 residual voltage input (60-120 V)4 binary inputs

Sensor inputmodule

Only with configuration G:3 combi sensor inputs (three-phase current and voltage)1 residual current input (0.2/1 A)1)

AI/BI module Only with configuration H and J:3 phase voltage inputs (60-210 V)1 residual voltage input (60-210 V)1 reference voltage input for SECRSYN1 (60-210 V)4 binary inputs

Optional BI/Omodule

Optional for configurations B and D:6 binary inputs3 SO contacts

X000 Optionalcommunicationmodule

See technical manual for details about different type ofcommunication modules.

1) The 0.2/1 A input is normally used in applications requiring sensitive earth-fault protection andfeaturing core-balance current transformers.

Rated values of the current and voltage inputs are basic setting parameters of theIED. The binary input thresholds are selectable within the range 18…176 V DC byadjusting the binary input setting parameters.

The connection diagrams of different hardware modules are presented in this manual.

See the installation manual for more information about the case andthe plug-in unit.

Section 2 1MRS756378 KREF615 overview

14 REF615Application Manual

Page 21: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 3: Number of physical connections in standard configurations

Conf. Analog channels Binary channels CT VT Combi sensor BI BO

A 4 1 - 3 6

B 4 - - 11 (17)1) 10 (13)1)

C 4 1 - 4 6

D 4 - - 12 (18)1) 10 (13)1)

E 4 52) - 16 10

F 4 52) - 16 10

G 1 - 33) 8 10

H 4 5 - 16 10

J 4 5 - 16 10

1) With optional BIO module2) One of the five channels reserved for future applications3) Combi sensor inputs for three-phase current and voltage

1MRS756378 K Section 2REF615 overview

REF615 15Application Manual

Page 22: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

2.4 Local HMI

REF615

Overcurrent

Dir. earth-fault

Voltage protection

Phase unbalance

Thermal overload

Breaker failure

Disturb. rec. Triggered

CB condition monitoring

Supervision

Arc detected

Autoreclose shot in progr.

A070704 V3 EN

Figure 1: Example of 615 series LHMI

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Display• Buttons• LED indicators• Communication port

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

2.4.1 DisplayThe LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. Thecharacter size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters androws fitting the view depends on the character size.

Section 2 1MRS756378 KREF615 overview

16 REF615Application Manual

Page 23: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 4: Characters and rows on the view

Character size Rows in view Characters on rowSmall, mono-spaced (6x12pixels)

5 rows10 rows with large screen

20

Large, variable width (13x14pixels)

4 rows8 rows with large screen

min 8

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2

3 4A070705 V3 EN

Figure 2: Display layout

1 Header

2 Icon

3 Content

4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)

2.4.2 LEDsThe LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start andTrip.

There are also 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDscan be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with theLHMI, WHMI or PCM600.

2.4.3 KeypadThe LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in differentviews or menus. With the push-buttons you can give open or close commands toobjects in the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a

1MRS756378 K Section 2REF615 overview

REF615 17Application Manual

Page 24: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

disconnector. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, resetindications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

A071176 V1 EN

Figure 3: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons and RJ-45 communication port

2.5 Web HMI

The WHMI enables the user to access the IED via a Web browser. The supportedWeb browser versions are Internet Explorer 7.0, 8.0 or 9.0.

WHMI is disabled by default.

WHMI offers several functions.

• Programmable LEDs and event lists• System supervision• Parameter settings• Measurement display• Disturbance records• Phasor diagram• Single-line diagram

The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.

Section 2 1MRS756378 KREF615 overview

18 REF615Application Manual

Page 25: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A070754 V4 EN

Figure 4: Example view of the WHMI

The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.

• Locally by connecting your laptop to the IED via the front communication port.• Remotely over LAN/WAN.

2.6 Authorization

The user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each withdifferent rights and default passwords.

The default passwords can be changed with Administrator user rights.

User authorization is disabled by default but WHMI always usesauthorization.

1MRS756378 K Section 2REF615 overview

REF615 19Application Manual

Page 26: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 5: Predefined user categories

Username User rightsVIEWER Read only access

OPERATOR • Selecting remote or local state with (only locally)• Changing setting groups• Controlling• Clearing indications

ENGINEER • Changing settings• Clearing event list• Clearing disturbance records• Changing system settings such as IP address, serial baud rate

or disturbance recorder settings• Setting the IED to test mode• Selecting language

ADMINISTRATOR • All listed above• Changing password• Factory default activation

For user authorization for PCM600, see PCM600 documentation.

2.6.1 Audit trail615 series IEDs offer a large set of event logging functions. Normal process relatedevents can be viewed by the normal user with Event Viewer in PCM600. Criticalsystem and IED security related events are logged to a separate non-volatile audittrail for the administrator.

Audit trail is a chronological record of system activities that enable thereconstruction and examination of the sequence of events and/or changes in anevent. Past user and process events can be examined and analyzed in a consistentmethod with the help of Event List and Event Viewer in PCM600. The IED stores2048 system events to non-volatile audit trail. Additionally, 1024 process eventsare stored in non-volatile event list. Both audit trail and event list work accordingto the FIFO principle.

User audit trail is defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE1686. The logging is based on predefined usernames or user categories. The useraudit trail events are supported in IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.

Table 6: Audit trail events

Enum Explanation/noteConfiguration change Configuration files changed

Firmware change

Setting group remote User changed setting group remotely

Table continues on next page

Section 2 1MRS756378 KREF615 overview

20 REF615Application Manual

Page 27: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Enum Explanation/noteSetting group local User changed setting group locally

Control remote DPC object control remote

Control local DPC object control local

Test on Test mode on

Test off Test mode off

Setting commit Settings has been changed

Time change

View audit log Administrator accessed audit trail

Login

Logout

Firmware reset Reset issued by user or tool

Audit overflow Too many audit events in the time period

PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events together withnormal events. Since only the administrator has the right to read audit trail,authorization must be properly configured in PCM600. The audit trail cannot bereset but PCM600 Event Viewer can filter data. Some of the audit trail events areinteresting also as normal process events.

To expose the audit trail events also as normal process events,define the level parameter via Configuration/Authorization/Authority logging.

Table 7: Audit trail events

Audit trail event Authority logging

NoneConfigurationchange

Settinggroup

Settinggroup,control

Settingsedit

Configuration change x x x x

Firmware change x x x x

Setting group remote x x x

Setting group local x x x

Control remote x x

Control local x x

Test on x x

Test off x x

Setting commit x

Time change

View audit log

Login

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 2REF615 overview

REF615 21Application Manual

Page 28: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Audit trail event Authority loggingLogout

Firmware reset

Audit overflow

2.7 Communication

The IED supports a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850, IEC60870-5-103, Modbus® and DNP3. Operational information and controls areavailable through these protocols. However, some communication functionality,for example, horizontal communication between the IEDs, is only enabled by theIEC 61850 communication protocol.

The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring andcontrol functions. Additionally, parameter settings, disturbance recordings andfault records can be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol. Disturbance recordingsare available to any Ethernet-based application in the standard COMTRADE fileformat. The IED can send and receive binary signals from other IEDs (so calledhorizontal communication) using the IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE profile, where thehighest performance class with a total transmission time of 3 ms is supported.Further, the IED supports sending and receiving of analog values using GOOSEmessaging. The IED meets the GOOSE performance requirements for trippingapplications in distribution substations, as defined by the IEC 61850 standard. TheIED can simultaneously report events to five different clients on the station bus.

The IED can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves one clientconnection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850 andModbus.

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed onintegrated optional communication modules. The IED can be connected to Ethernet-based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX) or the fibre-optic LC connector (100Base-FX). An optional serial interface is available forRS-232/RS-485 communication.

For the correct operation of redundant loop topology, it is essential that the externalswitches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in theswitches. Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to thenetwork. The IED itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP. The ringrecovery process is based on the aging of MAC addresses and link-up/link-downevents can cause temporary breaks in communication. For better performance ofthe self-healing loop, it is recommended that the external switch furthest from the615 IED loop is assigned as the root switch (bridge priority = 0) and the bridgepriority increases towards the IED loop. The end links of the IED loop can beattached to the same external switch or to two adjacent external switches. Self-healing Ethernet ring requires a communication module with at least two Ethernetinterfaces for all IEDs.

Section 2 1MRS756378 KREF615 overview

22 REF615Application Manual

Page 29: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

16384

32 16 0 0

0

16384

32 16128 48

3276840960

160 144112128

1761129680

36864 45056

Bridge priority32768

64 48Port priority

RE_615 RE_615 RE_615 RE_615

RE_615 RE_615 RE_615 RE_615

GUID-283597AF-9F38-4FC7-B87A-73BFDA272D0F V1 EN

Figure 5: Self-healing Ethernet ring solution

The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to thirty615 series IEDs. If more than 30 IEDs are to be connected, it isrecommended that the network is split into several rings with nomore than 30 IEDs per ring.

1MRS756378 K Section 2REF615 overview

REF615 23Application Manual

Page 30: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

24

Page 31: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Section 3 REF615 standard configurations

3.1 Standard configurations

REF615 is available in nine alternative standard configurations. The standardsignal configuration can be altered by means of the graphical signal matrix or thegraphical application functionality of the Protection and Control IED ManagerPCM600. Further, the application configuration functionality of PCM600 supportsthe creation of multi-layer logic functions using various logical elements, includingtimers and flip-flops. By combining protection functions with logic functionblocks, the IED configuration can be adapted to user-specific applicationrequirements.

Table 8: Standard configurations

Description Std. conf.Non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection and CB control A

Non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection, CB condition monitoring, CBcontrol and with the optional I/O module control of two network objects B

Non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-fault protection and CB control C

Non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-fault protection, CB condition monitoring, CBcontrol and with the optional I/O module control of two network objects D

Non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection with phase-voltage basedmeasurements, CB condition monitoring and CB control E

Directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection with phase-voltage basedmeasurements, undervoltage and overvoltage protection, CB condition monitoring and CB control F

Directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection, phase-voltage based protection andmeasurement functions, CB condition monitoring, CB control and sensor inputs G

Non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-fault protection, phase-voltage and frequencybased protection and measurement functions, synchro-check , CB condition monitoring and CB control H

Directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection, phase-voltage and frequency basedprotection and measurement functions, synchro check, CB condition monitoring and CB control J

Table 9: Supported functions

Functionality A B C D E F G H JProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage, instance 1 ● ● ● ● ● - - ● -

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 1 ● ● ● ● ● - - ● -

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 2 ● ● ● ● ● - - ● -

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 25Application Manual

Page 32: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Functionality A B C D E F G H JThree-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,low stage, instance 1 - - - - - ● ● - ●

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,low stage, instance 2 - - - - - ● ● - ●

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,high stage - - - - - ● ● - ●

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage, instance 1 - - ●1) ● 1) - - - ● 1) -

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage, instance 2 - - ● 1) ● 1) - - - ● 1) -

Non-directional earth-fault protection, highstage, instance 1 - - ● 1) ● 1) - - - ● 1) -

Non-directional earth-fault protection,instantaneous stage - - ● 1) ● 1) - - - ● 1) -

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 1 ● 1)2) ● 1)2) - - ● 1)4) ● 1)4) ● 1)3) - ● 1)4)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 2 ● 1)2) ● 1)2) - - ● 1)4) ● 1)4) ● 1)3) - ● 1)4)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage ● 1)2) ● 1)2) - - ● 1)4) ● 1)4) ● 1)3) - ● 1)4)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 1 o 1)2)5) o 1)2)5) - - o 1)4)5) o 1)4)5) o 1)5)6) - o 1)4)5)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 2 o 1)2)5) o 1)2)5) - - o 1)4)5) o 1)4)5) o 1)5)6) - o 1)4)5)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 3 o 1)2)5) o 1)2)5) - - o 1)4)5) o 1)4)5) o 1)5)6) - o 1)4)5)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 1 o 1)2)5) o 1)2)5) - - o 1)4)5) o 1)4)5) o 1)5)6) - o 1)4)5)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 2 o 1)2)5) o 1)2)5) - - o 1)4)5) o 1)4)5) o 1)5)6) - o 1)4)5)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 3 o 1)2)5) o 1)2)5) - - o 1)4)5) o 1)4)5) o 1)5)6) - o 1)4)5)

Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection ● 2)7) ● 2)7) - - ● 2)7) ● 2)7) - - ● 2)7)

Harmonics based earth-fault protection - o 5)7)8) - o 5)7)8) - o 5)7)8) - - o 5)7)8)

Non-directional (cross-country) earth faultprotection, using calculated Io ● 9) ● 9) - - ● 9) ● 9) ● 9) - ● 9)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Phase discontinuity protection ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ● 2) ● 2) - - ● 4) ● 4) ● 6) ● 4) ● 4)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ● 2) ● 2) - - ● 4) ● 4) ● 6) ● 4) ● 4)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ● 2) ● 2) - - ● 4) ● 4) ● 6) ● 4) ● 4)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance 1 - - - - - ● ● ● ●

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

26 REF615Application Manual

Page 33: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Functionality A B C D E F G H JThree-phase undervoltage protection, instance 2 - - - - - ● ● ● ●

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance 3 - - - - - ● ● ● ●

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 1 - - - - - ● ● ● ●

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 2 - - - - - ● ● ● ●

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 3 - - - - - ● ● ● ●

Positive-sequence undervoltage protection,instance 1 - - - - - ● ● - ●

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection,instance 1 - - - - - ● ● - ●

Frequency protection, instance 1 - - - - - - - ● ●

Frequency protection, instance 2 - - - - - - - ● ●

Frequency protection, instance 3 - - - - - - - ● ●

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers ● ● ● ● ● ● ● - ●

Circuit breaker failure protection ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Three-phase inrush detector ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Master trip, instance 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Master trip, instance 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Arc protection, instance 1 o o o o o o o o o

Arc protection, instance 2 o o o o o o o o o

Arc protection, instance 3 o o o o o o o o o

Control

Circuit-breaker control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Disconnector control, instance 1 - ●8) - ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8)

Disconnector control, instance 2 - ●8) - ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8)

Earthing switch control - ●8) - ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8)

Disconnector position indication, instance 1 - ● - ● ● ● ● ● ●

Disconnector position indication, instance 2 - ●8) - ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8)

Disconnector position indication, instance 3 - ●8) - ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8)

Earthing switch indication, instance 1 - ● - ● ● ● ● ● ●

Earthing switch indication, instance 2 - ●8) - ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8) ●8)

Auto-reclosing o o o o o o o o o

Synchronism and energizing check - - - - - - - ● ●

Condition Monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring - ● - ● ● ● ● ● ●

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Current circuit supervision - - - - ● ● ● ● ●

Fuse failure supervision - - - - ● ● ● ● ●

Power Quality

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 27Application Manual

Page 34: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Functionality A B C D E F G H JCurrent total demand distortion, instance 1 - - - - - - - - o 10)

Voltage total harmonic distortion, instance 1 - - - - - - - - o 10)

Voltage variation, instance 1 - - - - - - - - o 10)

Measurement

Disturbance recorder ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Sequence current measurement ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Residual current measurement, instance 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Three-phase voltage measurement - - - - ● ● ● ● ●

Residual voltage measurement ● ● - - ● ● - ● ●

Sequence voltage measurement - - - - ● ● ● ● ●

Three-phase power and energy measurement,including power factor - - - - ● ● ● ● ●

Frequency measurement - - - - - - - ● ●

● = Included,○ = Optional at the time of the order

1) I0 selectable by parameter, I0 measured as default.2) U0 measured is always used3) U0 calculated and negative sequence voltage selectable by parameter, U0 calculated as default.4) U0 selectable by parameter, U0 measured as default.5) One of the following can be ordered as an option: Admittance based E/F, Wattmetric based E/F or Harmonics based E/F. The option is

an addition to the existing E/F of the original configuration. The Admittance based and Wattmetric based optional E/F has also apredefined configuration in the relay. The optional E/F can be set on or off.

6) U0 calculated is always used.7) I0 measured is always used.8) Available in IED and SMT but not connected to anything in logic.9) Io selectable by parameter, Io calculated as default.10) This option includes Current total demand distrortion, Voltage total harmonic distortion and Voltage variation.

3.1.1 Addition of control functions for primary devices and theuse of binary inputs and outputsIf extra control functions intended for controllable primary devices are added to theconfiguration, additional binary inputs and/or outputs are needed to complementthe standard configuration.

If the number of inputs and/or outputs in a standard configuration is not sufficient,it is possible either to modify the chosen IED standard configuration in order torelease some binary inputs or binary outputs which have originally been configuredfor other purposes, or to integrate an external input/output module, for exampleRIO600, to the IED.

The external I/O module’s binary inputs and outputs of can be used for the less time-critical binary signals of the application. The integration enables releasing someinitially reserved binary inputs and outputs of the IED’s standard configuration.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

28 REF615Application Manual

Page 35: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The suitability of the IED’s binary outputs which have been selected for primarydevice control should be carefully verified, for example make and carry andbreaking capacity. If the requirements for the primary device control circuit are notmet, using external auxiliary relays should be considered.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 29Application Manual

Page 36: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.2 Connection diagrams

A071288 V6 EN

Figure 6: Connection diagram for the A and B configurations [1]

[1] Additional BIO-module (X110 in the diagram) is included in the IED variant B

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

30 REF615Application Manual

Page 37: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071290 V5 EN

Figure 7: Connection diagram for the C and D configurations [2]

[2] Additional BIO-module (X110 in the diagram) is included in the IED variant D

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 31Application Manual

Page 38: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-F7601942-ACF2-47E2-8F21-CD9C1D2BC1F0 V4 EN

Figure 8: Connection diagram for the E and F configurations

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

32 REF615Application Manual

Page 39: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-5D0135B3-3890-497A-8AAA-0362730C8682 V1 EN

Figure 9: Connection diagram for the E and F configurations

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 33Application Manual

Page 40: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-B70F0C14-52B2-4213-8781-5A7CA1E40451 V1 EN

Figure 10: Connection diagram for the G configuration

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

34 REF615Application Manual

Page 41: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-E8E2F79F-3DD8-46BD-8DE7-87A30133A7AE V1 EN

Figure 11: Connection diagram for the H and J configuration

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 35Application Manual

Page 42: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.3 Presentation of standard configurations

Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the IED's functionality from the protection,measuring, condition monitoring, disturbance recording, control and interlockingperspective. Diagrams show the default functionality with simple symbol logicsforming principle diagrams. The external connections to primary devices are alsoshown, stating the default connections to measuring transformers. The positivemeasuring direction of directional protection functions is towards the outgoing feeder.

The functional diagrams are divided into sections with each section constitutingone functional entity. The external connections are also divided into sections. Onlythe relevant connections for a particular functional entity are presented in eachsection.

Protection function blocks are part of the functional diagram. They are identifiedbased on their IEC 61850 name but the IEC based symbol and the ANSI functionnumber are also included. Some function blocks, such as PHHPTOC, are usedseveral times in the configuration. To separate the blocks from each other, the IEC61850 name, IEC symbol and ANSI function number are appended with a runningnumber, that is an instance number, from one upwards. If the block has no suffixafter the IEC or ANSI symbol, the function block has been used, that is,instantiated, only once. The IED’s internal functionality and the externalconnections are separated with a dashed line presenting the IED’s physical casing.

Signal Matrix and Application ConfigurationWith Signal Matrix and Application Configuration in PCM600, it is possible tomodify the standard configuration according to the actual needs. The IED isdelivered from the factory with default connections described in the functionaldiagrams for binary inputs, binary outputs, function-to-function connections andalarm LEDs. The Signal Matrix is used for GOOSE signal input engineering andfor making cross-references between the physical I/O signals and the functionblocks. The Signal Matrix tool cannot be used for adding or removing functionblocks, for example, GOOSE receive function blocks. The ApplicationConfiguration tool is used for these kind of operations. If a function block isremoved with Application Configuration, the function related data disappears fromthe menus as well as from the 61850 data model, with the exception of some basicfunction blocks, which are mandatory and thus cannot be removed from the IEDconfiguration by removing them from the Application Configuration.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

36 REF615Application Manual

Page 43: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.4 Standard configuration A

3.4.1 ApplicationsThe standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and directionalearthfault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feederapplications in isolated and resonant-earthed distribution networks. Theconfiguration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection basedon admittance or wattmetric based principle.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

3.4.2 FunctionsTable 10: Functions included in the standard configuration A

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage, instance 1 PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 1 PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 2 PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 1 DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 2 DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> 67N-2

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 1 EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 2 EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 3 EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 1 WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 2 WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 3 WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)

Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF 67NIEF

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 37Application Manual

Page 44: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSINon-directional (cross-country) earth faultprotection, using calculated Io EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Master trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Condition Monitoring

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo Vn

3.4.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 11: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage X120-1,2

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed position indication X120-3,2

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open position indication X120-4,2

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

38 REF615Application Manual

Page 45: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 12: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Circuit breaker failure protection trip to upstreambreaker

X100-8,9

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15,16,17,18,19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20,21,22,23,24

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,12

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14,15

Table 13: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Non-directional overcurrent operate

2 Directional/intermittent earth fault operate

3 Double (cross country) earth fault or residual overvoltage operate

4 Negative seq. overcurrent/phase discontinuity operate

5 Thermal overload alarm

6 Breaker failure operate

7 Disturbance recorder triggered

8 Not connected

9 Trip circuit supervision alarm

10 Arc protection operate

11 Auto reclose in progress

3.4.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 14: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 Uo

6 -

7 -

8 -

9 -

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 39Application Manual

Page 46: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Channel Selection and text10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

3.4.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents. The signal marked with Iorepresents the measured residual current via a core balance current transformer.The signal marked with Uo represents the measured residual voltage via open deltaconnected voltage transformers.

The EFHPTOC protection function block for double (cross-country) earth-faultsuses the calculated residual current originating from the measured phase currents.

3.4.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail andpicture the factory set default connections.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

40 REF615Application Manual

Page 47: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071316 V4 EN

Figure 12: Overcurrent protection

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.The instantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binaryinput 1 (X120:1-2). Two negative sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 andNSPTOC2) are offered for phase unbalance protection. The inrush detectionblock’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function ormultiplying the active settings for any of the described protection function blocks.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. LED 1is used for overcurrent and LED 4 for negative-sequence overcurrent protectionoperate indication. LED 4 is also used for phase discontinuity protection operateindication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 41Application Manual

Page 48: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

DEFLPDEF1

I0> -> (1)

67N-1 (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2

I0> -> (2)

67N-1 (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1

I0>> ->

67N-1I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE1

P0> -> (1)

32N (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE2

P0> -> (2)

32N (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE3

P0> -> (3)

32N (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

OR

INTRPTEF1

I0 >

67NIEFI0

U0

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

BLK_EF

EFHPTOC1

I0>>

51N-2I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

Calculated Io

LED2 (EF OPERATE)

EFPADM1

Y0> -> (1)

21YN (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM2

Y0> -> (2)

21YN (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM3

Y0> -> (3)

21YN (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

DOUBLE (CROSS-COUNTRY)

EARTH-FAULT PROTECTION

DIRECTIONAL EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

INTERMITTENT EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

WATTMETRIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

ADMITTANCE EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

LED3 (NEF OPERATE)

OR LED2 (WDE OPERATE)

OR LED2 (ADM OPERATE)

A071318 V6 EN

Figure 13: Directional earth-fault protection

Three stages are offered for directional earth-fault protection. According to theorder code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based onconventional directional earth-fault (DEFxPDEF) only, or alternatively togetherwith admittance criteria (EFPADM) or wattmetric earth-fault protection(WPWDE). In addition, there is a dedicated protection stage (INTRPTEF) eitherfor transient-based earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-faultprotection in compensated networks.

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block (EFHPTOC) is intendedfor protection against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

42 REF615Application Manual

Page 49: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

networks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip as well as to the alarm LEDs.LED 2 is used for directional earth-fault and LED 3 for double earth-faultprotection operate indication.

GUID-54404411-CD8E-4277-A0A1-80B31CBD45EC V2 EN

Figure 14: Residual overvoltage protection

The residual overvoltage protection (ROVPTOV) provides earth-fault protectionby detecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-faultfunctionality. The operation signal is connected to alarm LED 3.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 43Application Manual

Page 50: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFPADM2-operate

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate OR

X120_BI2 (CB Closed)

+

PO2

8

9

X100

LED6 (CBFP OPERATE)

CBFP trip to

upstream breaker

CCBRBRF1

3I>/Io -> BF

51BF/51NBF3I

Io

START

POSCLOSE

CB_FAULT

BLOCK

TRRET

TRBU

CB_FAULT_AL

PDNSTOC1

I2 / I1

46PD3I

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

T1PTTR1

3 >

49F3I

BLK_OPR

ENA_MULT

OPERATE

ALARM

BLK_CLOSE

START

THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

PHASE DISCONTINUITY PROTECTION

BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

LED5 (OVERLOAD ALARM)

LED4 (NPS/PD OPERATE)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operate

EFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operate

ARCSARC3-operate

A071320 V6 EN

Figure 15: Phase discontinuity, thermal overload and circuit breaker failureprotection

The phase discontinuity protection (PDNPSTOC1) provides protection forinterruptions in the normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downedconductor situations. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED and the disturbancerecorder. The thermal overload protection (T1PTTR1) provides indication onoverload situations. The operate signal of the thermal overload protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED. LED 4 is used for thephase discontinuity protection operate indication, the same as for negativesequence overcurrent protection operate indication, and LED 5 is used for thethermal overload protection alarm indication.

The breaker failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start input by anumber of different protection stages in the IED. The breaker failure protectionfunction offers different operating modes associated with the circuit breakerposition and the measured phase and residual currents. The breaker failureprotection has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own breaker through the Master Trip 2. The TRBUoutput is used to give a back-up trip to the breaker feeding upstream. For thispurpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the output PO2 (X100:8-9). LED 6 is used for back-up (TRBU) operate indication.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

44 REF615Application Manual

Page 51: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFPADM2-operate

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operate

DEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

X120_BI3 (CB Open)

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operateEFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

OR

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selectedINTRPTEF1-operate

OR

OR

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

A071322 V6 EN

Figure 16: Arc protection

Arc protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autoreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 45Application Manual

Page 52: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that canbe connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two differentoperation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. Operatesignals from the arc protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. It is possible to create individualautoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, the operation of selected protection functions are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

46 REF615Application Manual

Page 53: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.4.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder and trip circuitsupervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

BI#34

BI#35

BI#36

BI#37

TRIGGERED

OR

PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

DEFLPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startWPWDE1-start

ORDEFLPDEF2-startEFPADM2-startWPWDE2-start

ORDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM3-startWPWDE3-start

INTRPTEF1-startEFHPTOC1-startPDNSPTOC1-startT1PTTR1-startROVPTOV1-startROVPTOV2-startROVPTOV3-startCCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

INTRPTEF1-operateEFHPTOC1-operatePDNSPTOC1-operate

T1PTTR1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ORWPWDE3-operate

OR

ORROVPTOV1-operate

WPWDE2-operateWPWDE1-operate

ROVPTOV2-operateROVPTOV3-operate

ORARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateDARREC1-inproDARREC1-close_cbDARREC1-unsuc_recl

TCSSCBR2

BLOCK ALARM

BI 1 (Blocking)

BI 2 (CB Closed)

BI 3 (CB Open)

ORTRPPTRC1 - trip

TRPPTRC2 - trip

TCSSCBR1

BLOCK ALARM

OR LED9 (TCS ALARM)

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

A071324 V6 EN

Figure 17: Disturbance recorder

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed to trigger thedisturbance recorder or alternatively only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selectedautorecloser, the ARC protection signals and the three binary inputs from X120 arealso connected.

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 47Application Manual

Page 54: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

3.4.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

+

X100

16

17

15

18

OR

MASTER TRIP #1

Open CB /

trip coil 1PO3

TRPPTRC1

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

TRPPTRC2

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

DARREC1-open cbCBXCBR1-exe_op

MASTER TRIP #2

TCS1

OR

19

+

X100

22

21

23

PO4

TCS2 24

20

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operateOR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

CCBRBRF1-trret

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

Open CB /

trip coil 2

A071326 V6 EN

Figure 18: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breakerfrom local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binary

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

48 REF615Application Manual

Page 55: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

input can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

A071328 V5 EN

Figure 19: Circuit breaker control

The ENA_CLOSE input, which enables the closing of the circuit breaker, is astatus of the Master Trip in the breaker control function block CBXCBR. The openoperation is always enabled.

If the ENA_CLOSE signal is completely removed from the breakercontrol function block CBXCBR with PCM600, the functionassumes that the breaker close commands are allowed continuously.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 49Application Manual

Page 56: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TPGAPC1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 +

+

X100

10

1112

13

14

COMMON ALARM / INDICATION 1 & 2

Start Indication

Operate Indication

SO1

SO2

PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-start

DEFLPDEF1-start

EFHPTOC1-start

OR

DEFLPDEF2-startDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startEFPADM2-startEFPADM3-startINTRPTEF1-start

ROVPTOV1-start

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-start

WPWDE1-startWPWDE2-startWPWDE3-start

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateWPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

A071330 V5 EN

Figure 20: Alarm indication

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100: 13-15)

TPGAPC are timers and used for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs.There are four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) available in the IED. The remainingones not described in the functional diagram are available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

50 REF615Application Manual

Page 57: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.5 Standard configuration B

3.5.1 ApplicationsThe standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and directionalearthfault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feederapplications in isolated and resonant-earthed distribution networks. Theconfiguration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection basedon admittance, wattmetric or harmonic based principle.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

3.5.2 FunctionsTable 15: Functions included in the standard configuration B

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage, instance 1 PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 1 PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 2 PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 1 DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 2 DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> 67N-2

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 1 EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 2 EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 3 EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 1 WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 2 WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 3 WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)

Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF 67NIEF

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 51Application Manual

Page 58: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIHarmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA 51NHA

Non-directional (cross-country) earth faultprotection, using calculated Io EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Master trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Disconnector control, instance 1 DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC(1)

I <-> O DCC(1)

Disconnector control, instance 2 DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC(2)

I <-> O DCC(2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC

Disconnector position indication, instance 1 DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

Disconnector position indication, instance 2 DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

Disconnector position indication, instance 3 DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Earthing switch indication, instance 1 ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

Earthing switch indication, instance 2 ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Condition monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

52 REF615Application Manual

Page 59: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSISequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo Vn

3.5.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 16: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX110-BI2 Directional earth fault protection's basic angle control X110-3,4

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure indication X110-5,6

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication X110-6,7

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication X110-8,9

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (test position) indication X110-10,9

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication X110-11,12

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication X110-13,12

X120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage X120-1,2

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed indication X120-3,2

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open indication X120-4,2

Table 17: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Circuit breaker failure protection trip to upstreambreaker

X100-8,9

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15,16,17,18,19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20,21,22,23,24

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,12

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14,15

X110-SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking X110-14,15,16

X110-SO2 Overcurrent operate alarm X110-17,18,19

X110-SO3 Earth fault operate alarm X110-20,21,22

Table 18: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Non-directional overcurrent operate

2 Directional/intermittent earth fault operate

3 Double (cross country) earth fault or residual overvoltage operate

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 53Application Manual

Page 60: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

LED Default usage4 Negative seq. overcurrent/phase discontinuity operate

5 Thermal overload alarm

6 Breaker failure operate

7 Disturbance recorder triggered

8 Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm

9 Trip circuit supervision alarm

10 Arc protection operate

11 Auto reclose in progress

3.5.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 19: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 Uo

6 -

7 -

8 -

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

3.5.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

54 REF615Application Manual

Page 61: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents. The signal marked with Iorepresents the measured residual current via a core balance current transformer.The signal marked with Uo represents the measured residual voltage via open deltaconnected voltage transformers.

The EFHPTOC protection function block for double (cross-country) earth-faultsuses the calculated residual current originating from the measured phase currents.

3.5.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail andpicture the factory set default connections.

A071332 V5 EN

Figure 21: Overcurrent protection

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 55Application Manual

Page 62: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.The instantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binaryinput 1 (X120:1-2). Two negative sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 andNSPTOC2) are offered for phase unbalance protection. The inrush detectionblock’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function ormultiplying the active settings for any of the described protection function blocks.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. LED 1is used for overcurrent and LED 4 for negative-sequence overcurrent protectionoperate indication. LED 4 is also used for phase discontinuity protection operateindication.

The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second high stage(PHHPTOC2) is connected to the output SO1 (X110:14-16). This output is usedfor sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of theIED at the infeeding bay.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

56 REF615Application Manual

Page 63: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

DEFLPDEF1

I0> -> (1)

67N-1 (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2

I0> -> (2)

67N-1 (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1

I0>> ->

67N-1I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE1

P0> -> (1)

32N (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE2

P0> -> (2)

32N (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE3

P0> -> (3)

32N (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

OR

INTRPTEF1

I0 >

67NIEFI0

U0

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

BLK_EF

EFHPTOC1

I0>>

51N-2I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

Calculated Io

LED2 (EF OPERATE)

EFPADM1

Y0> -> (1)

21YN (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM2

Y0> -> (2)

21YN (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM3

Y0> -> (3)

21YN (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

DOUBLE (CROSS-COUNTRY)

EARTH-FAULT PROTECTION

DIRECTIONAL EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

INTERMITTENT EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

WATTMETRIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

ADMITTANCE EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

LED3 (NEF OPERATE)

OR LED2 (WDE OPERATE)

OR LED2 (ADM OPERATE)

X110

3

4

BI 2 (BACTRL)

HAEFPTOC1

I0>HA

51NHAI0

I_REF_RES

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

HARMONIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

A071334 V6 EN

Figure 22: Directional earth-fault protection

Three stages are offered for directional earth-fault protection. According to theorder code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based onconventional directional earth-fault (DEFxPDEF) only or alternatively togetherwith admittance criteria (EFPADM) or wattmetric earth-fault protection (WPWDE)or harmonic based earth-fault protection (HAEFPTOC). In addition, there is adedicated protection stage (INTRPTEF) either for transient-based earth-faultprotection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block (EFHPTOC) is intendedfor protection against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensatednetworks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 57Application Manual

Page 64: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The binary input 2 (X110:3-4) is intended for directional earth-fault protectionblocks’ relay characteristic angle (RCA: 0°/-90°) or operation mode (I0Sinφ/I0Cosφ) change. All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip as well as tothe alarm LEDs. LED 2 is used for directional earth-fault and LED 3 for double earth-fault protection operate indication.

GUID-54404411-CD8E-4277-A0A1-80B31CBD45EC V2 EN

Figure 23: Residual overvoltage protection

The residual overvoltage protection (ROVPTOV) provides earth-fault protectionby detecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-faultfunctionality. The operation signal is connected to alarm LED 3.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

58 REF615Application Manual

Page 65: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFPADM2-operate

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate OR

X120_BI2 (CB Closed)

+

PO2

8

9

X100

LED6 (CBFP OPERATE)

CBFP trip to

upstream breaker

CCBRBRF1

3I>/Io -> BF

51BF/51NBF3I

Io

START

POSCLOSE

CB_FAULT

BLOCK

TRRET

TRBU

CB_FAULT_AL

PDNSTOC1

I2 / I1

46PD3I

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

T1PTTR1

3 >

49F3I

BLK_OPR

ENA_MULT

OPERATE

ALARM

BLK_CLOSE

START

THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

PHASE DISCONTINUITY PROTECTION

BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

LED5 (OVERLOAD ALARM)

LED4 (NPS/PD OPERATE)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operate

EFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operate

ARCSARC3-operate

A071320 V6 EN

Figure 24: Phase discontinuity, thermal overload and circuit breaker failureprotection

The phase discontinuity protection (PDNPSTOC1) provides protection forinterruptions in the normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downedconductor situations. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED and the disturbancerecorder. The thermal overload protection (T1PTTR1) provides indication onoverload situations. The operate signal of the thermal overload protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED. LED 4 is used for thephase discontinuity protection operate indication, the same as for negativesequence overcurrent protection operate indication, and LED 5 is used for thethermal overload protection alarm indication.

The breaker failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start input by anumber of different protection stages in the IED. The breaker failure protectionfunction offers different operating modes associated with the circuit breakerposition and the measured phase and residual currents. The breaker failureprotection has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own breaker through the Master Trip 2. The TRBUoutput is used to give a back-up trip to the breaker feeding upstream. For thispurpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the output PO2 (X100:8-9). LED 6 is used for back-up (TRBU) operate indication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 59Application Manual

Page 66: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFPADM2-operate

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operate

DEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operateEFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

OR

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selectedINTRPTEF1-operate

OR

OR

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

X110

6

7

X120_BI3 (CB Open)

BI4 (CB Spring Charged)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

A071338 V7 EN

Figure 25: Arc protection

Arc protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autoreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

60 REF615Application Manual

Page 67: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that canbe connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two differentoperation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. Operatesignals from the arc protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. It is possible to create individualautoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, the operation of selected protection functions are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 61Application Manual

Page 68: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.5.3.2 Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and trip circuit supervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

BI#34

BI#35

BI#36

BI#37

TRIGGERED

OR

PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

DEFLPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startWPWDE1-start

ORDEFLPDEF2-startEFPADM2-startWPWDE2-start

ORDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM3-startWPWDE3-start

INTRPTEF1-startEFHPTOC1-startPDNSPTOC1-startT1PTTR1-startROVPTOV1-startROVPTOV2-startROVPTOV3-startCCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

INTRPTEF1-operateEFHPTOC1-operatePDNSPTOC1-operate

T1PTTR1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ORWPWDE3-operate

OR

ORROVPTOV1-operate

WPWDE2-operateWPWDE1-operate

ROVPTOV2-operateROVPTOV3-operate

ORARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateDARREC1-inproDARREC1-close_cbDARREC1-unsuc_recl

TCSSCBR2

BLOCK ALARM

BI 1 (Blocking)

BI 2 (CB Closed)

BI 3 (CB Open)

ORTRPPTRC1 - trip

TRPPTRC2 - trip

TCSSCBR1

BLOCK ALARM

OR LED9 (TCS ALARM)

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

A071324 V6 EN

Figure 26: Disturbance recorder

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed to trigger thedisturbance recorder or alternatively only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selectedautorecloser, the ARC protection signals and the three binary inputs from X120 arealso connected.

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

62 REF615Application Manual

Page 69: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

3.5.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

+

X100

16

17

15

18

OR

MASTER TRIP #1

Open CB /

trip coil 1PO3

TRPPTRC1

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

TRPPTRC2

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

DARREC1-open cbCBXCBR1-exe_op

MASTER TRIP #2

TCS1

OR

19

+

X100

22

21

23

PO4

TCS2 24

20

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operateOR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

CCBRBRF1-trret

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

Open CB /

trip coil 2

A071326 V6 EN

Figure 27: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breakerfrom local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binary

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 63Application Manual

Page 70: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

input can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

A071344 V6 EN

Figure 28: Circuit breaker control

There are two types of disconnector and earthing switch blocks available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration logic. If controllable operation is preferred, the controllabletype of disconnector and earthing switch blocks can be used instead of the statusonly type. The connection and configuration of the control blocks can be doneusing PCM600.

The binary inputs 5 and 6 of the additional card X110 are used for busbardisconnector (DCSXSWI1) or circuit-breaker truck position indication.

Table 20: Device positions indicated by binary inputs 5 and 6

Primary device position Input to be energized Input 5 (X110:8-9) Input 6 (X110:10-9)

Busbar disconnector closed x

Busbar disconnector open x

Circuit breaker truck in service position x

Circuit breaker truck in test position x

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

64 REF615Application Manual

Page 71: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The binary inputs 7 and 8 (X110:11-13) are designed for the position indication ofthe line-side earth switch.

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination ofthe disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position statuses and the statusesof the master trip logics and gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging.The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck isdefinitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, togetherwith the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enablesignal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation is alwaysenabled. The auto-recloser close command signals are directly connected to theoutput contact PO1 (X100:6-7).

The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing ofthe circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position, despite ofthe interlocking conditions being active when the circuit breaker truck is closed inservice position.

If the ENA_CLOSE signal is completely removed from the breakercontrol function block CBXCBR with PCM600, the functionassumes that the breaker close commands are allowed continuously.

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) supervises the circuitbreaker status based on the binary input information connected and measuredcurrent levels. The function introduces various supervision methods. Thecorresponding supervision alarm signals are routed to LED 8.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 65Application Manual

Page 72: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TPGAPC1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 +

+

X100

10

1112

13

14

COMMON ALARM / INDICATION 1 & 2

Start Indication

Operate Indication

SO1

SO2

PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-start

DEFLPDEF1-start

EFHPTOC1-start

OR

DEFLPDEF2-startDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startEFPADM2-startEFPADM3-startINTRPTEF1-start

ROVPTOV1-start

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-start

WPWDE1-startWPWDE2-startWPWDE3-start

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateWPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

+

+

X110

17

1918

20

22

Over Current

Operate Alarm

Earth Fault

Operate Alarm

SO2

SO3

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operateOR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

OR

TPGAPC2

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

21

A071346 V6 EN

Figure 29: Alarm indication

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100: 13-15)

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

66 REF615Application Manual

Page 73: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TPGAPC are timers and used for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs.There are four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) available in the IED. The remainingones not described in the functional diagram are available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

3.6 Standard configuration C

3.6.1 ApplicationsThe standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applicationsin directly or resistance earthed distribution networks.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

3.6.2 FunctionsTable 21: Functions included in the standard configuration C

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage, instance 1 PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 1 PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 2 PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage, instance 1 EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage, instance 2 EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, highstage, instance 1 EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection,instantaneous stage EFIPTOC1 Io>>> 50N/51N

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 67Application Manual

Page 74: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIThree-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Master trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Condition monitoring

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

3.6.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 22: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage X120-1,2

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed indication X120-3,2

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open indication X120-4,2

X120-BI4 Reset of master trip lockout X120-5,6

Table 23: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Circuit breaker failure protection trip to upstreambreaker

X100-8,9

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15,16,17,18,19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20,21,22,23,24

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,12

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14,15

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

68 REF615Application Manual

Page 75: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 24: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Non-directional overcurrent operate

2 Non-directional earth fault operate

3 Sensitive earth fault operate

4 Negative seq. overcurrent/phase discontinuity operate

5 Thermal overload alarm

6 Breaker failure operate

7 Disturbance recorder triggered

8 Not connected

9 Trip circuit supervision alarm

10 Arc protection operate

11 Auto reclose in progress

3.6.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 25: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 69Application Manual

Page 76: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.6.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents. The signal marked with Iorepresents the measured residual current via a summation connection of the phasecurrent transformers.

3.6.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail andpicture the factory set default connections.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

70 REF615Application Manual

Page 77: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071348 V3 EN

Figure 30: Overcurrent protection

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.The instantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binaryinput 1 (X120:1-2). Two negative sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 andNSPTOC2) are offered for phase unbalance protection. The inrush detectionblock’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function ormultiplying the active settings for any of the described protection function blocks.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. LED 1is used for overcurrent and LED 4 for negative-sequence overcurrent protectionoperate indication. LED 4 is also used for phase discontinuity protection operateindication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 71Application Manual

Page 78: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

LED2 (EF OPERATE)OR

EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

LED3 (SEF OPERATE)

I >EFLPTOC1

START

OPERATE

I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

51N-1

0

I >EFLPTOC2

START

OPERATE

I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

51N-1

0

I >>EFHPTOC1

START

OPERATE

I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

51N-2

0

I >>>EFIPTOC1

START

OPERATE

I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

50N

0

A071350 V4 EN

Figure 31: Non-directional earth-fault protection

Four stages are offered for non-directional earth-fault protection. One stage isdedicated to sensitive earth-fault protection.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip as well as to the alarm LEDs.LED 2 is used for directional earth-fault and LED 3 for the sensitive earth-faultprotection operate indication.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

72 REF615Application Manual

Page 79: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071352 V4 EN

Figure 32: Phase discontinuity, thermal overload and circuit breaker failureprotection

The phase discontinuity protection (PDNPSTOC1) provides protection forinterruptions in the normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downedconductor situations. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED and the disturbancerecorder. The thermal overload protection (T1PTTR1) provides indication onoverload situations. The operate signal of the thermal overload protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED. LED 4 is used for thephase discontinuity protection operate indication, the same as for negativesequence overcurrent protection operate indication, and LED 5 is used for thethermal overload protection alarm indication.

The breaker failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start input by anumber of different protection stages in the IED. The breaker failure protectionfunction offers different operating modes associated with the circuit breakerposition and the measured phase and residual currents. The breaker failureprotection has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own breaker through the Master Trip 2. The TRBUoutput is used to give a back-up trip to the breaker feeding upstream. For thispurpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the output PO2 (X100:8-9). LED 6 is used for back-up (TRBU) operate indication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 73Application Manual

Page 80: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

EFLPTOC1-operate

OR

X120_BI3 (CB Open)

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

OR

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selected

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

EFHPTOC1-operate

A071354 V5 EN

Figure 33: Arc protection

Arc protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autoreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that canbe connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two different

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

74 REF615Application Manual

Page 81: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

operation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. Operatesignals from the arc protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. It is possible to create individualautoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, the operation of selected protection functions are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

3.6.3.2 Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and trip circuit supervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

TRIGGEREDPHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-startT1PTTR1-startCCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

EFLPTOC2-operatePDNSPTOC1-operate

T1PTTR1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

OR

ORARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateDARREC1-inproDARREC1-close_cbDARREC1-unsuc_recl

TCSSCBR2

BLOCK ALARM

BI 1 (Blocking)BI 2 (CB Closed)

BI 3 (CB Open)

ORTRPPTRC1 - trip

TRPPTRC2 - trip

TCSSCBR1

BLOCK ALARM

OR LED9 (TCS ALARM)

EFLPTOC1-startEFHPTOC1-startEFIPTOC1-startEFLPTOC2-start

EFLPTOC1-operateEFHPTOC1-operateEFIPTOC1-operate

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

A071356 V4 EN

Figure 34: Disturbance recorder

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 75Application Manual

Page 82: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed to trigger thedisturbance recorder or alternatively only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selectedautorecloser, the ARC protection signals and the three binary inputs from X120 arealso connected.

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

3.6.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

A071358 V4 EN

Figure 35: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breakerfrom local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binary

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

76 REF615Application Manual

Page 83: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

input can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

A071360 V4 EN

Figure 36: Circuit breaker control

The ENA_CLOSE input, which enables the closing of the circuit breaker, is astatus of the Master Trip in the breaker control function block CBXCBR. The openoperation is always enabled.

If the ENA_CLOSE signal is completely removed from the breakercontrol function block CBXCBR with PCM600, the functionassumes that the breaker close commands are allowed continuously.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 77Application Manual

Page 84: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-start

PDNSPTOC1-operate

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operate

ARCSARC3-operate

EFLPTOC1-startEFHPTOC1-startEFIPTOC1-startEFLPTOC2-start

EFLPTOC1-operateEFHPTOC1-operateEFIPTOC1-operate

TPGAPC1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 +

+

X100

10

1112

13

14

EFLPTOC2-operate

OR

OR

COMMON ALARM / INDICATION 1 & 2

Start Indication

Operate Indication

SO1

SO2

A071362 V4 EN

Figure 37: Alarm indication

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100:13-14)

TPGAPC are timers and used for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs.There are four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) available in the IED. The remainingones not described in the functional diagram are available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

3.7 Standard configuration D

3.7.1 ApplicationsThe standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applicationsin directly or resistance earthed distribution networks.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

78 REF615Application Manual

Page 85: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.7.2 FunctionsTable 26: Functions included in the standard configuration D

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage, instance 1 PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 1 PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 2 PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage, instance 1 EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage, instance 2 EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, highstage, instance 1 EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection,instantaneous stage EFIPTOC1 Io>>> 50N/51N

Harmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA 51NHA

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Master trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Disconnector control, instance 1 DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC(1)

I <-> O DCC(1)

Disconnector control, instance 2 DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC(2)

I <-> O DCC(2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC

Disconnector position indication, instance 1 DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

Disconnector position indication, instance 2 DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

Disconnector position indication, instance 3 DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 79Application Manual

Page 86: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIEarthing switch indication, instance 1 ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

Earthing switch indication, instance 2 ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Condition monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

3.7.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 27: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX110-BI2 Auto reclose external start command X110-3,4

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure indication X110-5,6

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication X110-6,7

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication X110-8,9

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (test position) indication X110-10,9

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication X110-11,12

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication X110-13,12

X120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage X120-1,2

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed indication X120-3,2

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open indication X120-4,2

X120-BI4 Reset of master trip lockout X120-5,6

Table 28: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Circuit breaker failure protection trip to upstreambreaker

X100-8,9

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15,16,17,18,19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20,21,22,23,24

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,12

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14,15

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

80 REF615Application Manual

Page 87: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX110-SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking X110-14,15,16

X110-SO2 Overcurrent operate alarm X110-17,18,19

X110-SO3 Earth fault operate alarm X110-20,21,22

Table 29: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Non-directional overcurrent operate

2 Non-directional earth fault operate

3 Sensitive earth fault operate

4 Negative seq. overcurrent/phase discontinuity operate

5 Thermal overload alarm

6 Breaker failure operate

7 Disturbance recorder triggered

8 Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm

9 Trip circuit supervision alarm

10 Arc protection operate

11 Auto reclose in progress

3.7.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 30: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 81Application Manual

Page 88: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.7.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents. The signal marked with Iorepresents the measured residual current via a summation connection of the phasecurrent transformers.

3.7.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail andpicture the factory set default connections.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

82 REF615Application Manual

Page 89: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071364 V4 EN

Figure 38: Overcurrent protection

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.The instantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binaryinput 1 (X120:1-2). Two negative sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 andNSPTOC2) are offered for phase unbalance protection. The inrush detectionblock’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function ormultiplying the active settings for any of the described protection function blocks.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. LED 1is used for overcurrent and LED 4 for negative-sequence overcurrent protectionoperate indication. LED 4 is also used for phase discontinuity protection operateindication.

The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second high stage(PHHPTOC2) is connected to the output SO1 (X110:14-16). This output is usedfor sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of theIED at the infeeding bay.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 83Application Manual

Page 90: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

OR LED2 (EF OPERATE)

HAEFPTOC1

I0>HA

51NHAI0

I_REF_RES

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

HARMONIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

EFLPTOC1

I0> (1)

51N-1 (1)I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

EFLPTOC2

I0> (2)

51N-1 (2)I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

EFHPTOC1

I0>> (1)

51N-2 (1)I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

EFIPTOC1

I0>>>

50N/51NI0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

LED3 (SEF OPERATE)

EARTH-FAULT PROTECTION

SENSITIVE EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

GUID-319BCA20-DC11-4110-8E70-F9E9474CDA07 V1 EN

Figure 39: Non-directional earth-fault protection

Four stages are offered for non-directional earth-fault protection. One stage isdedicated to sensitive earth-fault protection. Based on the order code, theconfiguration can also include an optional harmonic-based earth-fault(HAEFPTOC) protection.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip as well as to the alarm LEDs.LED 2 is used for directional earth-fault and LED 3 for the sensitive earth-faultprotection operate indication.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

84 REF615Application Manual

Page 91: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071352 V4 EN

Figure 40: Phase discontinuity, thermal overload and circuit breaker failureprotection

The phase discontinuity protection (PDNPSTOC1) provides protection forinterruptions in the normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downedconductor situations. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED and the disturbancerecorder. The thermal overload protection (T1PTTR1) provides indication onoverload situations. The operate signal of the thermal overload protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED. LED 4 is used for thephase discontinuity protection operate indication, the same as for negativesequence overcurrent protection operate indication, and LED 5 is used for thethermal overload protection alarm indication.

The breaker failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start input by anumber of different protection stages in the IED. The breaker failure protectionfunction offers different operating modes associated with the circuit breakerposition and the measured phase and residual currents. The breaker failureprotection has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own breaker through the Master Trip 2. The TRBUoutput is used to give a back-up trip to the breaker feeding upstream. For thispurpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the output PO2 (X100:8-9). LED 6 is used for back-up (TRBU) operate indication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 85Application Manual

Page 92: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

OR

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

OR

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selected

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

X110

6

7

X120_BI3 (CB Open)

BI4 (CB Spring Charged)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

EFLPTOC1-operateEFHPTOC1-operateX110_BI2 (AR ext. Start)

A071370 V5 EN

Figure 41: Arc protection

Arc protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autoreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

86 REF615Application Manual

Page 93: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that canbe connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two differentoperation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. Operatesignals from the arc protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. The INIT6 input in the autorecloserfunction block is controlled by a binary input 2 (X110:3-4) enabling the use of theexternal start command. It is possible to create individual autoreclose sequences foreach input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, the operation of selected protection functions are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 87Application Manual

Page 94: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.7.3.2 Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and trip circuit supervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

TRIGGEREDPHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-startT1PTTR1-startCCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

EFLPTOC2-operatePDNSPTOC1-operate

T1PTTR1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

OR

ORARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateDARREC1-inproDARREC1-close_cbDARREC1-unsuc_recl

TCSSCBR2

BLOCK ALARM

BI 1 (Blocking)

BI 2 (CB Closed)

BI 3 (CB Open)

ORTRPPTRC1 - trip

TRPPTRC2 - trip

TCSSCBR1

BLOCK ALARM

OR LED9 (TCS ALARM)

EFLPTOC1-startEFHPTOC1-startEFIPTOC1-startEFLPTOC2-start

EFLPTOC1-operateEFHPTOC1-operateEFIPTOC1-operate

BI2 (AR_ext_start)

X110

3

4

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

A071372 V5 EN

Figure 42: Disturbance recorder

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed to trigger thedisturbance recorder or alternatively only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selectedautorecloser, the ARC protection signals and the three binary inputs from X120 arealso connected, as well as the autorecloser external start command from the binaryinput 2 (X110:3-4).

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

88 REF615Application Manual

Page 95: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.7.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

A071358 V4 EN

Figure 43: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breakerfrom local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binaryinput can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 89Application Manual

Page 96: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071376 V5 EN

Figure 44: Circuit breaker control

There are two types of disconnector and earthing switch blocks available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration logic. If controllable operation is preferred, the controllabletype of disconnector and earthing switch blocks can be used instead of the statusonly type. The connection and configuration of the control blocks can be doneusing PCM600.

The binary inputs 5 and 6 of the additional card X110 are used for busbardisconnector (DCSXSWI1) or circuit-breaker truck position indication.

Table 31: Device positions indicated by binary inputs 5 and 6

Primary device position Input to be energized Input 5 (X110:8-9) Input 6 (X110:10-9)

Busbar disconnector closed x

Busbar disconnector open x

Circuit breaker truck in service position x

Circuit breaker truck in test position x

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

90 REF615Application Manual

Page 97: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The binary inputs 7 and 8 (X110:11-13) are designed for the position indication ofthe line-side earth switch.

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination ofthe disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position statuses and the statusesof the master trip logics and gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging.The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck isdefinitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, togetherwith the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enablesignal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation is alwaysenabled. The auto-recloser close command signals are directly connected to theoutput contact PO1 (X100:6-7).

The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing ofthe circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position, despite ofthe interlocking conditions being active when the circuit breaker truck is closed inservice position.

If the ENA_CLOSE and BLK_CLOSE signals are completelyremoved from the breaker control function block CBXCBR withPCM600, the function assumes that the breaker close commandsare allowed continuously.

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) supervises the circuitbreaker status based on the binary input information connected and measuredcurrent levels. The function introduces various supervision methods. Thecorresponding supervision alarm signals are routed to LED 8.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 91Application Manual

Page 98: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071378 V4 EN

Figure 45: Alarm indication

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100:13-14)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the overcurrent protection function SO2

(X110:17-19)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the earth-fault protection function SO3

(X110:20-22)

TPGAPC are timers and used for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs.There are four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) available in the IED. The remainingones not described in the functional diagram are available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

92 REF615Application Manual

Page 99: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.8 Standard configuration E

3.8.1 ApplicationsThe standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and directionalearthfault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feederapplications in isolated and resonant-earthed distribution networks. Theconfiguration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection basedon admittance or wattmetric based principle.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

3.8.2 FunctionsTable 32: Functions included in the standard configuration E

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage, instance 1 PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 1 PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 2 PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 1 DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 2 DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> 67N-2

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 1 EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 2 EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 3 EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 1 WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 2 WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 3 WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)

Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF 67NIEF

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 93Application Manual

Page 100: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSINon-directional (cross-country) earth faultprotection, using calculated Io EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Master trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Disconnector control, instance 1 DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC(1)

I <-> O DCC(1)

Disconnector control, instance 2 DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC(2)

I <-> O DCC(2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC

Disconnector position indication, instance 1 DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

Disconnector position indication, instance 2 DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

Disconnector position indication, instance 3 DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Earthing switch indication, instance 1 ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

Earthing switch indication, instance 2 ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Condition monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Current circuit supervision CCRDIF1 MCS 3I MCS 3I

Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 FUSEF 60

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

94 REF615Application Manual

Page 101: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIResidual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U 3U

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo Vn

Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0

Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 P, E P, E

3.8.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 33: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX110-BI1 MCB open X110-1,2

X110-BI2 Directional earth fault protection's basic angle control X110-3,4

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm X110-5,6

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication X110-7,6

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication X110-8,9

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (test position) indication X110-10,9

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication X110-11,12

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication X110-13,12

X120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage X120-1,2

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed indication X120-3,2

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open indication X120-4,2

X120-BI4 Lock-out reset X120-5,6

Table 34: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker X100-8,9

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,(12)

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15-19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20-24

X110-SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking X110-14,15

X110-SO2 Overcurrent operate alarm X110-17,18

X110-SO3 Earth fault operate alarm X110-20,21

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 95Application Manual

Page 102: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 35: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Non-directional overcurrent protection operated

2 Directional earth-fault protection operated

3 Double (cross country) earth fault or residual overvoltage protection operated

4 Negative-sequence overcurrent or phase discontinuity protection operated

5 Thermal overload protection operated

6 Circuit-breaker failure protection backup protection operated

7 Disturbance recorder triggered

8 Circuit-breaker condition monitoring alarm

9 Supervision alarm

10 Arc fault detected

11 Autoreclose in progress

3.8.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 36: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 Uo

6 U1

7 U2

8 U3

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

96 REF615Application Manual

Page 103: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.8.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents. The signal marked with Iorepresents the measured residual current via a core balance current transformer.The signal marked with Uo represents the measured residual voltage via open deltaconnected voltage transformers.

The EFHPTOC protection function block for double (cross-country) earth-faultsuses the calculated residual current originating from the measured phase currents.

3.8.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail andpicture the factory set default connections.

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.The instantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binaryinput 1 (X120:1-2). Two negative sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 andNSPTOC2) are offered for phase unbalance protection. The inrush detectionblock’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function ormultiplying the active settings for any of the described protection function blocks.

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.The instantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binaryinput 1 (X120:1-2). Two negative sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 andNSPTOC2) are offered for phase unbalance protection. The inrush detectionblock’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function ormultiplying the active settings for any of the described protection function blocks.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 97Application Manual

Page 104: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-37D627C4-6097-4322-BACC-161CC6039EC5 V2 EN

Figure 46: Overcurrent protection

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. LED 1is used for overcurrent and LED 4 for negative-sequence overcurrent protectionoperate indication. LED 4 is also used for phase discontinuity protection operateindication.

The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second high stage(PHHPTOC2) is connected to the output SO1 (X110:14-16). This output is usedfor sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of theIED at the infeeding bay.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

98 REF615Application Manual

Page 105: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

DEFLPDEF1

I0> -> (1)

67N-1 (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2

I0> -> (2)

67N-1 (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1

I0>> ->

67N-1I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE1

P0> -> (1)

32N (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE2

P0> -> (2)

32N (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE3

P0> -> (3)

32N (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

OR

INTRPTEF1

I0 >

67NIEFI0

U0

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

BLK_EF

EFHPTOC1

I0>>

51N-2I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

Calculated Io

LED2 (EF OPERATE)

EFPADM1

Y0> -> (1)

21YN (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM2

Y0> -> (2)

21YN (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM3

Y0> -> (3)

21YN (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

DOUBLE (CROSS-COUNTRY)

EARTH-FAULT PROTECTION

DIRECTIONAL EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

INTERMITTENT EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

WATTMETRIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

ADMITTANCE EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

LED3 (NEF OPERATE)

OR LED2 (WDE OPERATE)

OR LED2 (ADM OPERATE)

X110

3

4

BI 2 (BACTRL)

CCRDIF_FAIL

GUID-1F3C1F26-6F11-4250-9476-82C47C3AC570 V3 EN

Figure 47: Directional earth-fault protection

Three stages are offered for directional earth-fault protection. According to theorder code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based onconventional directional earth-fault (DEFxPDEF) only or alternatively togetherwith admittance criteria (EFPADM) or wattmetric earth-fault protection (WPWDE)or harmonic based earth-fault protection (HAEFPTOC). In addition, there is adedicated protection stage (INTRPTEF) either for transient-based earth-faultprotection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block (EFHPTOC) is intendedfor protection against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensatednetworks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 99Application Manual

Page 106: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The binary input 2 (X110:3-4) is intended for directional earth-fault protectionblocks’ relay characteristic angle (RCA: 0°/-90°) or operation mode (I0Sinφ/I0Cosφ) change. All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip as well as tothe alarm LEDs. LED 2 is used for directional earth-fault and LED 3 for double earth-fault protection operate indication.

GUID-3A78AEF7-8219-42C1-9BB9-FBAED53FF38F V1 EN

Figure 48: Residual overvoltage protection

The residual overvoltage protection (ROVPTOV) provides earth-fault protectionby detecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-faultfunctionality. The operation signal is connected to alarm LED 3.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

100 REF615Application Manual

Page 107: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFPADM2-operate

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate OR

X120_BI2 (CB Closed)

+

PO2

8

9

X100

LED6 (CBFP OPERATE)

CBFP trip to

upstream breaker

CCBRBRF1

3I>/Io -> BF

51BF/51NBF3I

Io

START

POSCLOSE

CB_FAULT

BLOCK

TRRET

TRBU

CB_FAULT_AL

PDNSTOC1

I2 / I1

46PD3I

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

T1PTTR1

3 >

49F3I

BLK_OPR

ENA_MULT

OPERATE

ALARM

BLK_CLOSE

START

THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

PHASE DISCONTINUITY PROTECTION

BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

LED5 (OVERLOAD ALARM)

LED4 (NPS/PD OPERATE)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operate

EFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operate

ARCSARC3-operate

CCRDIF_FAIL

GUID-8BD4614B-2C4D-475E-ADC3-A376E213BF3C V3 EN

Figure 49: Phase discontinuity, thermal overload and circuit breaker failureprotection

The phase discontinuity protection (PDNPSTOC1) provides protection forinterruptions in the normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downedconductor situations. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED and the disturbancerecorder. The thermal overload protection (T1PTTR1) provides indication onoverload situations. The operate signal of the thermal overload protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED. LED 4 is used for thephase discontinuity protection operate indication, the same as for negativesequence overcurrent protection operate indication, and LED 5 is used for thethermal overload protection alarm indication.

The breaker failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start input by anumber of different protection stages in the IED. The breaker failure protectionfunction offers different operating modes associated with the circuit breakerposition and the measured phase and residual currents. The breaker failureprotection has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own breaker through the Master Trip 2. The TRBUoutput is used to give a back-up trip to the breaker feeding upstream. For thispurpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the output PO2 (X100:8-9). LED 6 is used for back-up (TRBU) operate indication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 101Application Manual

Page 108: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFPADM2-operate

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operate

DEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operateEFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

OR

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selectedINTRPTEF1-operate

OR

OR

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

X110

6

7

X120_BI3 (CB Open)

BI4 (CB Spring Charged)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

A071338 V7 EN

Figure 50: Arc protection

Arc protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autoreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

102 REF615Application Manual

Page 109: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that canbe connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two differentoperation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. Operatesignals from the arc protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. It is possible to create individualautoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, the operation of selected protection functions are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 103Application Manual

Page 110: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.8.3.2 Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and trip circuit supervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)

OR

PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

DEFLPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startWPWDE1-start

ORDEFLPDEF2-startEFPADM2-startWPWDE2-start

ORDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM3-startWPWDE3-start

INTRPTEF1-startEFHPTOC1-startPDNSPTOC1-startT1PTTR1-startROVPTOV1-startROVPTOV2-startROVPTOV3-startCCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

INTRPTEF1-operateEFHPTOC1-operatePDNSPTOC1-operate

T1PTTR1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ORWPWDE3-operate

OR

ORROVPTOV1-operate

WPWDE2-operateWPWDE1-operate

ROVPTOV2-operateROVPTOV3-operate

ORARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

DARREC-inpro

BI 1 (Blocking)BI 2 (CB Closed)BI 3 (CB Open)

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

BI#34

BI#35

BI#36

BI#37

BI#38

BI#39

TRIGGERED

ORDARREC-close-cbDARREC-unsuc-recl

SEQRFUF_3PHSEQRFUF_UCCRDIF_FAIL

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

GUID-4BE45287-D708-41F3-851A-084A9AC3265E V3 EN

Figure 51: Disturbance recorder

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed either to triggerthe disturbance recorder or to be recorded by the disturbance recorder, dependingon the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected autorecloser, the ARCprotection signals and the three binary inputs from X120 are also connected.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

104 REF615Application Manual

Page 111: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-48DD2A49-CF29-4088-914B-7AE1629E18CA V2 EN

Figure 52: Trip circuit supervision

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

The fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 detects failures in voltage measurementcircuits. Failures, such as an open miniature circuit breaker, are detected and thealarm is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Failures in current measuring circuits are detected by CCRDIF. When a failure isdetected, blocking signal is activated in current protection functions that aremeasuring calculated sequence component currents, and unnecessary operation canbe avoided. The alarm signal is connected to the alarm LED 9.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 105Application Manual

Page 112: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.8.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

+

X100

16

17

15

18

OR

MASTER TRIP #1

Open CB /

trip coil 1PO3

TRPPTRC1

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

TRPPTRC2

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

DARREC1-open cb

CBXCBR1-exe_op

MASTER TRIP #2

TCS1

OR

19

+

X100

22

21

23

PO4

TCS2 24

20

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operateOR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

CCBRBRF1-trret

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

Open CB /

trip coil 2

BI4 (Lock-out reset)

GUID-4963C315-60C2-4C60-BE7F-B18D87A8D35E V3 EN

Figure 53: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breakerfrom local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binaryinput can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

106 REF615Application Manual

Page 113: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-4DED2926-A92A-4F6A-BCAA-7D9CD24ACFC8 V3 EN

Figure 54: Circuit breaker control

There are two types of disconnector and earthing switch blocks available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration logic. If controllable operation is preferred, the controllabletype of disconnector and earthing switch blocks can be used instead of the statusonly type. The connection and configuration of the control blocks can be doneusing PCM600.

The binary inputs 5 and 6 of the additional card X110 are used for busbardisconnector (DCSXSWI1) or circuit-breaker truck position indication.

Table 37: Device positions indicated by binary inputs 5 and 6

Primary device position Input to be energized Input 5 (X110:8-9) Input 6 (X110:10-9)

Busbar disconnector closed x

Busbar disconnector open x

Circuit breaker truck in service position x

Circuit breaker truck in test position x

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 107Application Manual

Page 114: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The binary inputs 7 and 8 (X110:11-13) are designed for the position indication ofthe line-side earth switch.

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination ofthe disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position statuses and the statusesof the master trip logics and gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging.The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck isdefinitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, togetherwith the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enablesignal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation is alwaysenabled. The auto-recloser close command signals are directly connected to theoutput contact PO1 (X100:6-7).

The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing ofthe circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position, despite ofthe interlocking conditions being active when the circuit breaker truck is closed inservice position.

If the ENA_CLOSE and BLK_CLOSE signals are completelyremoved from the breaker control function block CBXCBR withPCM600, the function assumes that the breaker close commandsare allowed continuously.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

108 REF615Application Manual

Page 115: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TPGAPC1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 +

+

X100

10

1112

13

14

COMMON ALARM / INDICATION 1 & 2

Start Indication

Operate Indication

SO1

SO2

PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-start

DEFLPDEF1-start

EFHPTOC1-start

OR

DEFLPDEF2-startDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startEFPADM2-startEFPADM3-startINTRPTEF1-start

ROVPTOV1-start

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-start

WPWDE1-startWPWDE2-startWPWDE3-start

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateWPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

+

+

X110

17

1918

20

22

Over Current

Operate Alarm

Earth Fault

Operate Alarm

SO2

SO3

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operateOR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

OR

TPGAPC2

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

21

GUID-572DA8CC-7A7D-4F9F-87C5-272A4283FB3E V3 EN

Figure 55: Alarm indication

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) supervises the circuitbreaker status based on the binary input information connected and measuredcurrent levels. The function introduces various supervision methods. Thecorresponding supervision alarm signals are routed to LED 8.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 109Application Manual

Page 116: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100:13-14)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the overcurrent protection function SO2

(X110:17-19)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the earth-fault protection function SO3

(X110:20-22)

TPGAPC are timers and used for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs.There are four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) available in the IED. The remainingones not described in the functional diagram are available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

3.9 Standard configuration F

3.9.1 Applications

The standard configuration for directional overcurrent and directional earth-faultprotection with phase-voltage based measurements, undervoltage and overvoltageprotection is mainly intended for comprehensive protection and controlfunctionality of circuit breaker controlled asynchronous motors. With minormodifications this standard configuration can be applied also for contactorcontrolled motors. The configuration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic based principle.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

3.9.2 FunctionsTable 38: Functions included in the standard configuration F

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,low stage, instance 1 DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,low stage, instance 2 DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,high stage DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> 67-2

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

110 REF615Application Manual

Page 117: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIDirectional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 1 DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 2 DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> 67N-2

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 1 EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 2 EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 3 EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 1 WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 2 WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 3 WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)

Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF 67NIEF

Harmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA 51NHA

Non-directional (cross-country) earth faultprotection, using calculated Io EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance1 PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance2 PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance3 PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 1 PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 2 PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 3 PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)

Positive-sequence undervoltage protection,instance 1 PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection,instance 1 NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 111Application Manual

Page 118: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIMaster trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Disconnector control, instance 1 DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC(1)

I <-> O DCC(1)

Disconnector control, instance 2 DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC(2)

I <-> O DCC(2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC

Disconnector position indication, instance 1 DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

Disconnector position indication, instance 2 DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

Disconnector position indication, instance 3 DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Earthing switch indication, instance 1 ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

Earthing switch indication, instance 2 ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Condition monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Current circuit supervision CCRDIF1 MCS 3I MCS 3I

Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 FUSEF 60

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U 3U

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo Vn

Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0

Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 P, E P, E

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

112 REF615Application Manual

Page 119: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.9.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 39: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX110-BI1 MCB open X110-1,2

X110-BI2 Directional earth fault protection's basic angle control X110-3,4

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure indication X110-5,6

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication X110-7,6

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication X110-8,9

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (test position) indication X110-10,9

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication X110-11,12

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication X110-13,12

X120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage X120-1,2

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed indication X120-3,2

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open indication X120-4,2

X120-BI4 Lock-out reset X120-5,6

Table 40: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker X100-8,9

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,(12)

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15-19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20-24

X110-SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking X110-14,15

X110-SO2 Overcurrent operate alarm X110-17,18

X110-SO3 Earth fault operate alarm X110-20,21

X110-SO4 Voltage protection operate alarm X110-23,24

Table 41: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Overcurrent protection operated

2 Earth-fault protection operated

3 Voltage protection operated

4 Negative-sequence overcurrent or phase discontinuity protection operated

5 Thermal overload protection operated

6 Circuit-breaker failure protection backup protection operated

7 Disturbance recorder triggered

8 Circuit-breaker condition monitoring alarm

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 113Application Manual

Page 120: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

LED Default usage9 Supervision alarm

10 Arc fault detected

11 Autoreclose in progress

3.9.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 42: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 Uo

6 U1

7 U2

8 U3

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

3.9.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents and 3U the three phase voltages.The signal marked with Io represents the measured residual current via a corebalance current transformer. The signal marked with Uo represents the measuredresidual voltage via open-delta connected voltage transformers.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

114 REF615Application Manual

Page 121: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The EFHPTOC protection function block for double (cross-country) earth-faultsuses the calculated residual current originating from the measured phase currents.

3.9.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail andpicture the factory set default connections.

Four overcurrent stages are available for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.Three of them include directional functionality (DPHxPDOC). The non-directionalinstantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binary input 1(X120:1-2). Two negative-sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 andNSPTOC2) are available for phase unbalance protection. The inrush detectionblock’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function ormultiplying the active settings for any of the shown protection function blocks.

GUID-F0BE506C-0A96-4AA2-AC55-FFD9BCD23951 V2 EN

Figure 56: Directional overcurrent protection

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. LED 1is used for overcurrent and LED 4 for negative-sequence overcurrent protectionoperate indication. LED 4 is also used for phase discontinuity protection operateindication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 115Application Manual

Page 122: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The upstream blocking from the start of the directional overcurrent second lowstage (DPHLPDOC2) is connected to the output SO1 (X110:14-16). This output isused for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage ofthe IED at the infeeding bay.

X110

3

4

DEFLPDEF1

I0> -> (1)

67N-1 (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2

I0> -> (2)

67N-1 (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1

I0>> ->

67N-1I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

BI 2 (BACTRL)

WPWDE1

P0> -> (1)

32N (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE2

P0> -> (2)

32N (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE3

P0> -> (3)

32N (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

OR

INTRPTEF1

I0 >

67NIEFI0

U0

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

BLK_EF

EFHPTOC1

I0>>

51N-2I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

Calculated Io

LED2 (EF OPERATE)

CCRDIF_FAIL

ROV-operate

EFPADM1

Y0> -> (1)

21YN (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM2

Y0> -> (2)

21YN (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM3

Y0> -> (3)

21YN (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

HAEFPTOC1

I0>HA

51NHAI0

I_REF_RES

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

DOUBLE (CROSS-COUNTRY)

EARTH-FAULT PROTECTION

DIRECTIONAL EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

INTERMITTENT EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

WATTMETRIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

ADMITTANCE EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

HARMONIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

GUID-F82FE8A6-6AA1-44D9-8FE2-8B2C51CEA7AA V3 EN

Figure 57: Directional earth-fault protection

Three stages are offered for directional earth-fault protection. According to theorder code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based onconventional directional earth-fault (DEFxPDEF) only or alternatively togetherwith admittance criteria (EFPADM) or wattmetric earth-fault protection (WPWDE)or harmonic based earth-fault protection (HAEFPTOC). In addition, there is adedicated protection stage (INTRPTEF) either for transient-based earth-faultprotection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

116 REF615Application Manual

Page 123: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block (EFHPTOC) is intendedfor protection against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensatednetworks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.

The binary input 2 (X110:3-4) is intended for directional earth-fault protectionblocks’ relay characteristic angle (RCA: 0°/-90°) or operation mode (I0Sinφ/I0Cosφ) change. All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip as well as tothe alarm LED 2.

DPHHPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operate

PHIPTOC1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

X120_BI2 (CB Closed)

+

PO2

8

9

X100

LED6 (CBFP OPERATE)

CBFP trip to

upstream breaker

CCBRBRF1

3I>/Io -> BF

51BF/51NBF3I

Io

START

POSCLOSE

CB_FAULT

BLOCK

TRRET

TRBU

CB_FAULT_AL

PDNSTOC1

I2 / I1

46PD3I

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

T1PTTR1

3 >

49F3I

BLK_OPR

ENA_MULT

OPERATE

ALARM

BLK_CLOSE

START

THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

PHASE DISCONTINUITY PROTECTION

BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

LED5 (OVERLOAD ALARM)

LED4 (NPS/PD OPERATE)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

CCRDIF_FAIL

EFPADM2-operate

EFPADM3-operate

GUID-5F0B30AD-0B3F-4B6D-BFAC-7209FA9DAACD V3 EN

Figure 58: Phase discontinuity, thermal overload and circuit breaker failureprotection

The phase discontinuity protection (PDNPSTOC1) provides protection forinterruptions in the normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downedconductor situations. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED and the disturbancerecorder. The thermal overload protection (T1PTTR1) provides indication onoverload situations. The operate signal of the thermal overload protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED. LED 4 is used for thephase discontinuity protection operate indication, the same as for negativesequence overcurrent protection operate indication, and LED 5 is used for thethermal overload protection alarm indication.

The breaker failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start input by anumber of different protection stages in the IED. The breaker failure protection

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 117Application Manual

Page 124: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit breakerposition and the measured phase and residual currents. The breaker failureprotection has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own breaker through the Master Trip 2. The TRBUoutput is used to give a back-up trip to the breaker feeding upstream. For thispurpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the output PO2 (X100:8-9). LED 6 is used for back-up (TRBU) operate indication.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

118 REF615Application Manual

Page 125: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFPADM2-operate

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operate

DEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operateEFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

OR

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selectedINTRPTEF1-operate

OR

OR

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

X110

6

7

X120_BI3 (CB Open)

BI4 (CB Spring Charged)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

GUID-EC907A8E-9CF0-4150-A394-FFBAF30A8725 V3 EN

Figure 59: Arc protection

Arc protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autoreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 119Application Manual

Page 126: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that canbe connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two differentoperation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. Operatesignals from the arc protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. It is possible to create individualautoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, the operation of selected protection functions are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

120 REF615Application Manual

Page 127: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-BCEB1C2E-BC64-4E79-8329-A5D9FCD7AB2F V2 EN

Figure 60: Overvoltage and undervoltage protection

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages (PHxPTOV and PHxPTUV)offer protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. The operation ofvoltage functions is connected to alarm LED 3. A failure in the voltage measuringcircuit is detected by the fuse failure function and the activation is connected toundervoltage protection functions to avoid faulty undervoltage tripping.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 121Application Manual

Page 128: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-A77D0608-E3F2-4D3D-8907-15034FC42D51 V2 EN

Figure 61: Positive-sequence undervoltage and negative-sequenceovervoltage protection

Positive-sequence undervoltage (PSPTUV) and negative-sequence overvoltage(NSPTOV) protection functions enable voltage-based unbalance protection. Theoperation signals of voltage-sequence functions are connected to alarm LED 3,which is a combined voltage protection alarm LED.

GUID-54404411-CD8E-4277-A0A1-80B31CBD45EC V2 EN

Figure 62: Residual overvoltage protection

The residual overvoltage protection (ROVPTOV) provides earth-fault protectionby detecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a non-selective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.The operation signal is connected to alarm LED 2.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

122 REF615Application Manual

Page 129: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.9.3.2 Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and trip circuit supervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)

OR

DPHLPDOC1-startDPHLPDOC2-startDPHHPDOC1-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

DEFLPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startWPWDE1-start

ORDEFLPDEF2-startEFPADM2-startWPWDE2-start

ORDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM3-startWPWDE3-start

INTRPTEF1-startEFHPTOC1-startPDNSPTOC1-startT1PTTR1-startPHPTOV1-startPHPTOV2-startPHPTOV3-start

CCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

INTRPTEF1-operateEFHPTOC1-operatePDNSPTOC1-operate

T1PTTR1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ORWPWDE3-operate

OR

ORPHPTOV1-operate

WPWDE2-operateWPWDE1-operate

ARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateDARREC-inpro

BI 1 (Blocking)BI 2 (CB Closed)BI 3 (CB Open)

ORDARREC-close-cbDARREC-unsuc-recl

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

BI#34

BI#35

BI#36

BI#37

BI#38

BI#39

BI#40

BI#41

BI#42

BI#43

BI#44

BI#45

BI#46

BI#47

BI#48

BI#49

TRIGGERED

SEQRFUF_3PHSEQRFUF_UCCRDIF_FAIL

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-startROVPTOV1-start

PHPTUV1-startPHPTUV2-startPHPTUV3-start

NSPTOV1-startPSPTUV1-start

PHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operate

PSPTUV1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operateNSPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV2-operateROVPTOV3-operate

OR

ORPHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

OR

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

GUID-A2EBA677-AEF4-451B-807B-20F50D5894C7 V3 EN

Figure 63: Disturbance recorder

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed either to triggerthe disturbance recorder or to be recorded by the disturbance recorder, dependingon the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected autorecloser, the ARCprotection signals and the three binary inputs from X120 are also connected.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 123Application Manual

Page 130: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-F06A3FEF-2C72-49A4-928F-D301335EC2C6 V3 EN

Figure 64: Trip circuit supervision

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

The fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 detects failures in voltage measurementcircuits. Failures, such as an open miniature circuit breaker, are detected and thealarm is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Failures in current measuring circuits are detected by CCRDIF. When a failure isdetected, blocking signal is activated in current protection functions that aremeasuring calculated sequence component currents, and unnecessary operation canbe avoided. The alarm signal is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

124 REF615Application Manual

Page 131: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.9.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate +

X100

16

17

15

18

OR

MASTER TRIP #1

Open CB /

trip coil 1PO3

TRPPTRC1

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

TRPPTRC2

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

DARREC-open cb

CBXCBR1-exe_op

MASTER TRIP #2

TCS1

OR

19

+

X100

22

21

23

PO4

TCS2 24

20

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

INTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

Open CB /

trip coil 2

BI 4 (Lock-out reset)

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

INTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

OR

CCBRBRF1-trret

GUID-300441A3-AE3C-4BBF-8C5A-B5CA8BA4EF53 V3 EN

Figure 65: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breakerfrom local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 125Application Manual

Page 132: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binaryinput can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

GUID-DE498CFB-A256-4275-9A1F-5EF3B09046F4 V3 EN

Figure 66: Circuit breaker control

There are two types of disconnector and earthing switch blocks available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration logic. If controllable operation is preferred, the controllabletype of disconnector and earthing switch blocks can be used instead of the statusonly type. The connection and configuration of the control blocks can be doneusing PCM600.

The binary inputs 5 and 6 of the additional card X110 are used for busbardisconnector (DCSXSWI1) or circuit-breaker truck position indication.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

126 REF615Application Manual

Page 133: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 43: Device positions indicated by binary inputs 5 and 6

Primary device position Input to be energized Input 5 (X110:8-9) Input 6 (X110:10-9)

Busbar disconnector closed x

Busbar disconnector open x

Circuit breaker truck in service position x

Circuit breaker truck in test position x

The binary inputs 7 and 8 (X110:11-13) are designed for the position indication ofthe line-side earth switch.

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination ofthe disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position statuses and the statusesof the master trip logics and gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging.The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck isdefinitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, togetherwith the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enablesignal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation is alwaysenabled. The auto-recloser close command signals are directly connected to theoutput contact PO1 (X100:6-7).

The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing ofthe circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position, despite ofthe interlocking conditions being active when the circuit breaker truck is closed inservice position.

If the ENA_CLOSE and BLK_CLOSE signals are completelyremoved from the breaker control function block CBXCBR withPCM600, the function assumes that the breaker close commandsare allowed continuously.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 127Application Manual

Page 134: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TPGAPC1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 +

+

X100

10

1112

13

14

COMMON ALARM / INDICATION 1 & 2

Start Indication

Operate Indication

SO1

SO2

DPHLPDOC1-startDPHLPDOC2-startDPHHPDOC1-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-start

DEFLPDEF1-start

EFHPTOC1-start

OR

DEFLPDEF2-startDEFHPDEF1-start

EFPADM1-startEFPADM2-startEFPADM3-start

INTRPTEF1-start

ROVPTOV1-start

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-start

WPWDE1-startWPWDE2-startWPWDE3-start

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

INTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

+

+

X110

17

1918

20

22

Over Current

Operate Alarm

Earth Fault

Operate Alarm

SO2

SO3

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operateOR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ORTPGAPC2

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

21

PHPTOV1-startPHPTOV2-startPHPTOV3-startPSPTUV1-startNSPTOV1-startPHPTUV1-startPHPTUV2-startPHPTUV3-start

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

+ 23

24TPGAPC3

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

SO4

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operate

PSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operate

PHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

OR

Voltage

Protection

Operate Alarm

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operate

GUID-79EB68EE-F160-402E-A841-BC6D074E7294 V3 EN

Figure 67: Alarm indication

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

128 REF615Application Manual

Page 135: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) supervises the circuitbreaker status based on the binary input information connected and measuredcurrent levels. The function introduces various supervision methods. Thecorresponding supervision alarm signals are routed to LED 8.

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100:13-14)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the overcurrent protection function SO2

(X110:17-19)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the earth-fault protection function SO3

(X110:20-22)

TPGAPC 1...3 are timers used for setting the minimum pulse length for theoutputs. Four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) are available in the IED. Theremaining one not described in the functional diagram is available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

3.10 Standard configuration G

3.10.1 ApplicationsThe standard configuration for non-directional earth-fault, voltage and frequencyprotection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications indirect or resistance earthed distribution networks. The configuration also includesadditional options to select earth-fault protection based on admittance or wattmetricprinciple

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

3.10.2 FunctionsTable 44: Functions included in the standard configuration G

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,low stage, instance 1 DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,low stage, instance 2 DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 129Application Manual

Page 136: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIThree-phase directional overcurrent protection,high stage DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> 67-2

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 1 DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 2 DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> 67N-2

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 1 EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 2 EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 3 EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 1 WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 2 WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 3 WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)

Non-directional (cross-country) earth faultprotection, using calculated Io EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance1 PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance2 PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance3 PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 1 PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 2 PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 3 PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)

Positive-sequence undervoltage protection,instance 1 PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection,instance 1 NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

130 REF615Application Manual

Page 137: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIMaster trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Disconnector control, instance 1 DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC(1)

I <-> O DCC(1)

Disconnector control, instance 2 DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC(2)

I <-> O DCC(2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC

Disconnector position indication, instance 1 DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

Disconnector position indication, instance 2 DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

Disconnector position indication, instance 3 DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Earthing switch indication, instance 1 ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

Earthing switch indication, instance 2 ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Condition monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Current circuit supervision CCRDIF1 MCS 3I MCS 3I

Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 FUSEF 60

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U 3U

Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0

Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 P, E P, E

3.10.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 45: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX110-BI1 Circuit breaker closed indication X110-1,2

X110-BI2 Circuit breaker open indication X110-3,4

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure indication X110-5,6

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 131Application Manual

Page 138: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication X110-7,6

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication X110-8,9

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (test position) indication X110-10,9

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication X110-11,12

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication X110-13,12

Table 46: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker X100-8,9

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,(12)

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15-19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20-24

X110-SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking X110-14,15,16

X110-SO2 Overcurrent operate alarm X110-17,18,19

X110-SO3 Earth fault operate alarm X110-20,21,22

X110-SO4 Voltage protection operate alarm X110-23,24

Table 47: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Overcurrent protection operated

2 Earth-fault protection operated

3 Voltage protection operated

4 Negative-sequence overcurrent or phase discontinuity protection operated

5 Thermal overload protection operated

6 Circuit-breaker failure protection backup protection operated

7 Disturbance recorder triggered

8 Circuit-breaker condition monitoring alarm

9 Supervision alarm

10 Arc fault detected

11 Autoreclose in progress

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

132 REF615Application Manual

Page 139: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.10.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 48: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 U1

6 U2

7 U3

8 -

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

3.10.2.3 Sensor settings

Rogowski sensor setting exampleIn this example, a 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz sensor is used and the application has a150 A nominal current (In). As the Rogowski sensor is linear and does not saturate,the 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz sensor also works as a 150 A/0.28125 V at 50 Hzsensor. When defining another primary value for the sensor, also the nominalvoltage has to be redefined to maintain the same transformation ratio. However, thesetting in the IED (Rated Secondary Value) is not in V but in mV/Hz, which makesthe same setting value valid for both 50 and 60 Hz nominal frequency. RatedSecondary Value is calculated with the formula:

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 133Application Manual

Page 140: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

I

IK

fRSV

n

prr

n

=

GUID-6A480073-5C35-4319-8B38-402608D4C098 V1 EN

In the application nominal current

Ipr the sensor rated primary current

fn network nominal frequency

Kr the sensor rated voltage (in mV) at the rated current

RSV the Rated Secondary Value in mV/Hz

In this example, this is then:

150

80150

505 625

A

AmV

Hz

mV

Hz

= .

GUID-13DE42A0-29C0-4FE0-B00B-1215B37E3B7B V1 EN

With this information, the IED Rogowski sensor settings can be set.

Table 49: Example setting values

PrimaryCurrent

150 A

RatedSecondaryValue

5.625 mV/Hz

NominalCurrent

150 A

Unless otherwise specified, the Nominal Current setting shouldalways be the same as the Primary Current setting.

3.10.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

134 REF615Application Manual

Page 141: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents and 3U the three phase voltages.The signal marked with Io represents the measured residual current via a corebalance current transformer. The signal marked with Uo represents the measuredresidual voltage via open-delta connected voltage transformers.

The EFHPTOC protection function block for double (cross-country) earth-faultsuses the calculated residual current originating from the measured phase currents.

3.10.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail andpicture the factory set default connections.

Four overcurrent stages are available for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.Three of them include directional functionality (DPHxPDOC) and one non-directional instantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1). The inrush detection block’s(INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function or multiplyingthe active settings for any of the shown protection function blocks.

GUID-3A5BC077-38FE-436B-B5FC-B7259E991B3A V1 EN

Figure 68: Directional overcurrent protection

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. LED 1is used for overcurrent protection.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 135Application Manual

Page 142: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The upstream blocking from the start of the directional overcurrent second lowstage (DPHLPDOC2) is connected to the output SO1 (X110:14-16). This output isused for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage ofthe IED at the infeeding bay.

DEFLPDEF1

I0> -> (1)

67N-1 (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2

I0> -> (2)

67N-1 (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1

I0>> ->

67N-1I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE1

P0> -> (1)

32N (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE2

P0> -> (2)

32N (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE3

P0> -> (3)

32N (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

OR

EFHPTOC1

I0>>

51N-2I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

Calculated Io

LED2 (EF OPERATE)

EFPADM1

Y0> -> (1)

21YN (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM2

Y0> -> (2)

21YN (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM3

Y0> -> (3)

21YN (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

DOUBLE (CROSS-COUNTRY)

EARTH-FAULT PROTECTION

DIRECTIONAL EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

WATTMETRIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

ADMITTANCE EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

LED2

(EFHPTOC1 OPERATE)

OR LED2 (WDE OPERATE)

OR LED2 (ADM OPERATE)

CCRDIF_FAIL

GUID-1B89C44D-E560-4A69-B3FF-F723E6F32AD3 V2 EN

Figure 69: Directional earth-fault protection

Three stages are offered for directional earth-fault protection. According to theorder code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based onconventional directional earth-fault (DEFxPDEF) only, or alternatively togetherwith admittance criteria (EFPADM) or wattmetric earth-fault protection (WPWDE).

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

136 REF615Application Manual

Page 143: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block (EFHPTOC) is intendedfor protection against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensatednetworks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and also to the alarm LEDs.LED 2 is used for directional earth-fault.

GUID-1FA9FD40-94F8-449B-9459-B8636F28F8DB V1 EN

Figure 70: Thermal overload protection

The thermal overload protection (T1PTTR1) provides indication on overloadsituations. LED 5 is used for the thermal overload protection alarm indication.

GUID-DF067AB4-DCBA-44CF-A95A-44B2248382BC V1 EN

Figure 71: Negative sequence and phase discontinuity protection

Two negative sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2) are offeredfor phase unbalance protection. The phase discontinuity protection (PDNPSTOC1)provides protection for interruptions in the normal three-phase load supply, forexample, in downed conductor situations. The operate signal of the phasediscontinuity protection is connected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LEDand the disturbance recorder. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 137Application Manual

Page 144: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

protection is connected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED. LED 4 is usedfor the phase discontinuity protection operate indication, the same as for negativesequence overcurrent protection operate indication.

DPHHPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operate

PHIPTOC1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

X110_BI1 (CB Closed)

+

PO2

8

9

X100

LED6 (CBFP OPERATE)

CBFP trip to

upstream breaker

CCBRBRF1

3I>/Io -> BF

51BF/51NBF3I

Io

START

POSCLOSE

CB_FAULT

BLOCK

TRRET

TRBU

CB_FAULT_AL

BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

EFPADM2-operate

EFPADM3-operate

DPHLPDOC1-operate

GUID-8293B89D-5E82-4F3D-A04A-A3695184AC3F V2 EN

Figure 72: Circuit breaker failure protection

The circuit-breaker failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start inputby a number of different protection stages in the IED. CCBRBRF1 offers differentoperating modes associated with the circuit-breaker position and the measuredphase and residual currents.

CCBRBRF1 has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own circuit breaker through the Master Trip Logic2. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the circuit breaker feedingupstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to theoutput PO2 (X100: 8-9). LED 6 is used for backup (TRBU) operate indication.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

138 REF615Application Manual

Page 145: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)OR

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

GUID-8F763D1C-AFD0-4F5C-A410-54A286B8B5F9 V2 EN

Figure 73: Arc protection

Arc protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autoreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that canbe connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two differentoperation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. Operatesignals from the arc protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 139Application Manual

Page 146: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFPADM2-operate

DPHHPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operate

DEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operateEFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selected

OR

OR

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

X110

6

7

X110_BI2 (CB Open)

BI4 (CB Spring Charged)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

X110

4

5 BI3 (CB Gas Pressure Alarm)

GUID-58EB259F-66F3-47FB-A8EC-86827E49E4F3 V2 EN

Figure 74: Autoreclosing

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. It is possible to create individualautoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, the operation of selected protection functions are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

140 REF615Application Manual

Page 147: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-9DBFA490-E41B-4E4B-B519-9FCA442E3D74 V1 EN

Figure 75: Overvoltage and undervoltage protection

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages (PHxPTOV and PHxPTUV)offer protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. The operation ofvoltage functions is connected to alarm LED 3. A failure in the voltage measuringcircuit is detected by the fuse failure function and the activation is connected toundervoltage protection functions to avoid faulty undervoltage tripping.

GUID-C956665C-599A-4EF5-9821-EAD02FF4EF0F V1 EN

Figure 76: Positive-sequence undervoltage and negative-sequenceovervoltage protection

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 141Application Manual

Page 148: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Positive-sequence undervoltage (PSPTUV) and negative-sequence overvoltage(NSPTOV) protection functions enable voltage-based unbalance protection. Theoperation signals of voltage-sequence functions are connected to alarm LED 3,which is a combined voltage protection alarm LED.

GUID-54404411-CD8E-4277-A0A1-80B31CBD45EC V2 EN

Figure 77: Residual overvoltage protection

The residual overvoltage protection (ROVPTOV) provides earth-fault protectionby detecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a non-selective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.The operation signal is connected to alarm LED 2.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

142 REF615Application Manual

Page 149: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.10.3.2 Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and trip circuit supervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)

OR

DPHLPDOC1-startDPHLPDOC2-startDPHHPDOC1-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

DEFLPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startWPWDE1-start

ORDEFLPDEF2-startEFPADM2-startWPWDE2-start

ORDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM3-startWPWDE3-start

EFHPTOC1-startPDNSPTOC1-startT1PTTR1-startPHPTOV1-startPHPTOV2-startPHPTOV3-start

CCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

EFHPTOC1-operatePDNSPTOC1-operate

T1PTTR1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ORWPWDE3-operate

OR

ORPHPTOV1-operate

WPWDE2-operateWPWDE1-operate

ORARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateDARREC-inpro

BI 2 (CB Closed)BI 3 (CB Open)

DARREC-close-cbDARREC-unsuc-recl

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

BI#34

BI#35

BI#36

BI#37

BI#38

BI#39

BI#40

BI#41

BI#42

BI#43

BI#44

BI#45

BI#46

BI#47

TRIGGERED

SEQRFUF_3PHSEQRFUF_UCCRDIF_FAIL

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-startROVPTOV1-start

PHPTUV1-startPHPTUV2-startPHPTUV3-start

NSPTOV1-startPSPTUV1-start

PHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operate

PSPTUV1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operateNSPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV2-operateROVPTOV3-operate

OR

ORPHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

GUID-E37B8348-2881-46DF-843F-3A7AB81FE1A3 V2 EN

Figure 78: Disturbance recorder

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed either to triggerthe disturbance recorder or to be recorded by the disturbance recorder, dependingon the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected autorecloser, the ARCprotection signals and the two binary inputs from X110 are also connected.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 143Application Manual

Page 150: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-CE169E2B-B258-4E17-A631-0796214D3627 V1 EN

Figure 79: Trip circuit supervision

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

The fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 detects failures in voltage measurementcircuits. Failures, such as an open miniature circuit breaker, are detected and thealarm is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Failures in current measuring circuits are detected by CCRDIF. When a failure isdetected, blocking signal is activated in current protection functions that aremeasuring calculated sequence component currents, and unnecessary operation canbe avoided. The alarm signal is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

144 REF615Application Manual

Page 151: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.10.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate +

X100

16

17

15

18

OR

MASTER TRIP #1

Open CB /

trip coil 1PO3

TRPPTRC1

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

TRPPTRC2

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

DARREC-open cb

CBXCBR1-exe_op

MASTER TRIP #2

TCS1

OR

19

+

X100

22

21

23

PO4

TCS2 24

20

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

Open CB /

trip coil 2

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

OR

CCBRBRF1-trret

GUID-C18D52E2-C85E-45F4-93E0-5081024F3B13 V2 EN

Figure 80: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breakerfrom local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binary

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 145Application Manual

Page 152: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

input can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

GUID-E4885797-0852-4754-80DB-E094BE033192 V2 EN

Figure 81: Circuit breaker control

There are two types of disconnector and earthing switch blocks available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration logic. If controllable operation is preferred, the controllabletype of disconnector and earthing switch blocks can be used instead of the statusonly type. The connection and configuration of the control blocks can be doneusing PCM600.

The binary inputs 5 and 6 of the additional card X110 are used for busbardisconnector (DCSXSWI1) or circuit-breaker truck position indication.

Table 50: Device positions indicated by binary inputs 5 and 6

Primary device position Input to be energized Input 5 (X110:8-9) Input 6 (X110:10-9)

Busbar disconnector closed x

Busbar disconnector open x

Circuit breaker truck in service position x

Circuit breaker truck in test position x

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

146 REF615Application Manual

Page 153: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The binary inputs 7 and 8 (X110:11-13) are designed for the position indication ofthe line-side earth switch.

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination ofthe disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position statuses and the statusesof the master trip logics and gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging.The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck isdefinitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, togetherwith the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enablesignal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation is alwaysenabled. The auto-recloser close command signals are directly connected to theoutput contact PO1 (X100:6-7).

The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing ofthe circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position, despite ofthe interlocking conditions being active when the circuit breaker truck is closed inservice position.

If the ENA_CLOSE and BLK_CLOSE signals are completelyremoved from the breaker control function block CBXCBR withPCM600, the function assumes that the breaker close commandsare allowed continuously.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 147Application Manual

Page 154: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TPGAPC1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 +

+

X100

10

1112

13

14

COMMON ALARM / INDICATION 1 & 2

Start Indication

Operate Indication

SO1

SO2

DPHLPDOC1-startDPHLPDOC2-startDPHHPDOC1-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-start

DEFLPDEF1-start

EFHPTOC1-start

OR

DEFLPDEF2-startDEFHPDEF1-start

EFPADM1-startEFPADM2-startEFPADM3-start

ROVPTOV1-start

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-start

WPWDE1-startWPWDE2-startWPWDE3-start

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

+

+

X110

17

1918

20

22

Over Current

Operate Alarm

Earth Fault

Operate Alarm

SO2

SO3

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ORTPGAPC2

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

21

PHPTOV1-startPHPTOV2-startPHPTOV3-startPSPTUV1-startNSPTOV1-startPHPTUV1-startPHPTUV2-startPHPTUV3-start

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

+ 23

24TPGAPC3

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

SO4

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operate

PSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operate

PHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

OR

Voltage

Protection

Operate Alarm

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operate

GUID-7750871D-CD1D-4675-9584-9ACE54A56A20 V2 EN

Figure 82: Alarm indication

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

148 REF615Application Manual

Page 155: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) supervises the circuitbreaker status based on the binary input information connected and measuredcurrent levels. The function introduces various supervision methods. Thecorresponding supervision alarm signals are routed to LED 8.

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100:13-14)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the overcurrent protection function SO2

(X110:17-19)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the earth-fault protection function SO3

(X110:20-22)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the voltage protection function SO4

(X110:23-24)

TPGAPC 1...3 are timers used for setting the minimum pulse length for theoutputs. Four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) are available in the IED. Theremaining one not described in the functional diagram is available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

3.11 Standard configuration H

3.11.1 ApplicationsThe standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-fault, phase-voltage and frequency protection and measurement functions is mainlyintended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications in directly or resistance-earthed distribution networks.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

3.11.2 FunctionsTable 51: Functions included in the standard configuration H

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage, instance 1 PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 1 PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 149Application Manual

Page 156: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIThree-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage, instance 2 PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage, instance 1 EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage, instance 2 EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, highstage, instance 1 EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection,instantaneous stage EFIPTOC1 Io>>> 50N/51N

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance1 PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance2 PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance3 PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 1 PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 2 PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 3 PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)

Frequency protection, instance 1 FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81 (1)

Frequency protection, instance 2 FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81 (2)

Frequency protection, instance 3 FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81 (3)

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Master trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Disconnector control, instance 1 DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC(1)

I <-> O DCC(1)

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

150 REF615Application Manual

Page 157: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Disconnector control, instance 2 DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC(2)

I <-> O DCC(2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC

Disconnector position indication, instance 1 DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

Disconnector position indication, instance 2 DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

Disconnector position indication, instance 3 DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Earthing switch indication, instance 1 ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

Earthing switch indication, instance 2 ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN1 SYNC 25

Condition monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Current circuit supervision CCRDIF1 MCS 3I MCS 3I

Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 FUSEF 60

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U 3U

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo Vn

Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0

Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 P, E P, E

Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f f

3.11.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 52: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX110-BI1 Busbar VT secondary MCB open X110-1,2

X110-BI2 Line VT secondary MCB open X110-3,4

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure indication X110-5,6

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication X110-7,6

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication X110-8,9

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (test position) indication X110-10,9

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication X110-11,12

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication X110-13,12

X120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage X120-1,2

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 151Application Manual

Page 158: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed indication X120-3,2

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open indication X120-4,2

X120-BI4 Lock-out reset X120-5,6

Table 53: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker X100-8,9

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,(12)

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15-19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20-24

X110-SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking X110-14,15,16

X110-SO2 Overcurrent operate alarm X110-17,18,19

X110-SO3 Earth fault operate alarm X110-20,21,22

X110-SO4 Voltage protection operate alarm X110-23,24

Table 54: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Overcurrent protection operated

2 Earth-fault protection operated

3 Combined protection operated indication

4 Synchronism or energizing check OK

5 Frequency protection

6 Circuit-breaker failure protection backup protection operated

8 Circuit-breaker condition monitoring alarm

9 Supervision alarm

10 Arc fault detected

11 Autoreclose in progress

3.11.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 55: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

152 REF615Application Manual

Page 159: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Channel Selection and text4 Io

5 Uo

6 U1

7 U2

8 U3

9 U1B

10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

3.11.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents and 3U the three phase voltages.The signal marked with Io represents the measured residual current via a corebalance current transformer. The signal marked with Uo represents the measuredresidual voltage via open-delta connected voltage transformers.

The EFHPTOC protection function block for double (cross-country) earth-faultsuses the calculated residual current originating from the measured phase currents.

3.11.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail andpicture the factory set default connections.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 153Application Manual

Page 160: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-2AF21F47-B720-41A8-98CA-FEC94F5244CC V1 EN

Figure 83: Non-directional overcurrent protection

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.The instantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binaryinput 1 (X120:1-2). The inrush detection block’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2Henables either blocking the function or multiplying the active settings for any of thedescribed protection function blocks.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. LED 1is used for overcurrent and LED 4 for negative-sequence overcurrent protectionoperate indication. LED 4 is also used for phase discontinuity protection operateindication.

The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second high stage(PHHPTOC2) is connected to the output SO1 (X110:14-16). This output is usedfor sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of theIED at the infeeding bay.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

154 REF615Application Manual

Page 161: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-816ECD29-2D22-4C2A-9BF1-625A48657362 V1 EN

Figure 84: Non-directional earth-fault protection

Four stages are offered for non-directional earth-fault protection. One stage isdedicated to sensitive earth-fault protection.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip as well as to the alarm LEDs.LED 2 is used for directional earth-fault.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 155Application Manual

Page 162: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-6EDB21C6-F84E-4FF6-942B-0A17D43F952F V1 EN

Figure 85: Negative sequence and phase discontinuity protection

Two negative sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2) are offeredfor phase unbalance protection.

The phase discontinuity protection (PDNPSTOC1) provides protection forinterruptions in the normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downedconductor situations. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity protection isconnected to the Master Trip and also to an alarm LED and the disturbancerecorder. The operate signal of the phase discontinuity protection is connected tothe Master Trip and also to an alarm LED. LED 3 is used for the phasediscontinuity protection operate indication, the same as for negative sequenceovercurrent protection operate indication.

GUID-20D34999-565D-4376-8537-A27A9D57D9FE V1 EN

Figure 86: Circuit breaker failure protection

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

156 REF615Application Manual

Page 163: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The breaker failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start input by anumber of different protection stages in the IED. The breaker failure protectionfunction offers different operating modes associated with the circuit breakerposition and the measured phase and residual currents. The breaker failureprotection has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own breaker through the Master Trip 2. The TRBUoutput is used to give a back-up trip to the breaker feeding upstream. For thispurpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the output PO2 (X100:8-9). LED 6 is used for back-up (TRBU) operate indication.

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)OR

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

GUID-8F763D1C-AFD0-4F5C-A410-54A286B8B5F9 V2 EN

Figure 87: Arc protection

Arc protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autoreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that canbe connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two differentoperation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. Operatesignals from the arc protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 157Application Manual

Page 164: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

EFLPTOC2-operate

ORARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selected

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

X110

6

7

X120_BI3 (CB Open)

BI4 (CB Spring Charged)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

X110

4

5 BI3 (CB Gas Pressure Alarm)

PHHPTOC2-operatePHHPTOC1-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

SECRSYN-sync_ok

GUID-B25B20B6-AED0-4400-9146-96E0755DCD8D V2 EN

Figure 88: Autoreclosing

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. It is possible to create individualautoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, the operation of selected protection functions are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

158 REF615Application Manual

Page 165: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-09BE5AE5-818D-4131-B963-241D17E0484C V1 EN

Figure 89: Overvoltage and undervoltage protection

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages (PHxPTOV and PHxPTUV)offer protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. The operation ofvoltage functions is connected to alarm LED 3. A failure in the voltage measuringcircuit is detected by the fuse failure function and the activation is connected toundervoltage protection functions to avoid faulty undervoltage tripping.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 159Application Manual

Page 166: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-54404411-CD8E-4277-A0A1-80B31CBD45EC V2 EN

Figure 90: Residual overvoltage protection

The residual overvoltage protection (ROVPTOV) provides earth-fault protectionby detecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a non-selective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.The operation signal is connected to alarm LED 2.

GUID-189240C6-E7AE-4314-87C2-3EC3AC84E6CC V1 EN

Figure 91: Frequency protection

The selectable underfrequency or overfrequency protection (FRPFRQ) preventsdamage to network components under unwanted frequency conditions.

The function contains a selectable rate of change of the frequency (gradient)protection to detect an increase or decrease in the fast power system frequency at

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

160 REF615Application Manual

Page 167: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

an early stage. This can be used as an early indication of a disturbance in thesystem. The operation signal is connected to alarm LED 5.

3.11.3.2 Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and trip circuit supervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-startEFLPTOC1-start

PDNSPTOC1-startPHPTOV1-startPHPTOV2-startPHPTOV3-start

CCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

EFHPTOC1-operatePDNSPTOC1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

ORPHPTOV1-operate

ORARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateDARREC-inpro

BI 2 (CB Closed)BI 3 (CB Open)

DARREC-close-cbDARREC-unsuc-recl

SEQRFUF_3PHSEQRFUF_UCCRDIF_FAIL

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-startROVPTOV1-start

PHPTUV1-startPHPTUV2-startPHPTUV3-start

PHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operate

ROVPTOV1-operateROVPTOV2-operateROVPTOV3-operate

ORPHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

BI#34

BI#35

BI#36

BI#37

BI#38

BI#39

BI#40

BI#41

BI#42

BI#43

BI#44

BI#45

BI#46

BI#47

BI#48

BI#49

BI#50

BI#51

BI#52

TRIGGERED

OR

EFLPTOC1-operateEFLPTOC2-operateEFHPTOC1-operateEFIPTOC1-operate

ORFRPFRQ1-operateFRPFRQ2-operateFRPFRQ3-operate

OR

SECRSYN-sync_okSECRSYN-cl_fail_al

SECRSYN-inpro

SECRSYN-cmd_fail_al

BI 1 (Blocking)

EFLPTOC2-startEFHPTOC2-startEFIPTOC1-start

FRPFRQ1-startFRPFRQ2-startFRPFRQ3-start

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

GUID-B439B2BF-732E-4B6B-987B-B4C587E3A38C V2 EN

Figure 92: Disturbance recorder

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed either to triggerthe disturbance recorder or to be recorded by the disturbance recorder, dependingon the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected autorecloser, the ARCprotection signals, the synchrocheck signals and the three binary inputs from X120are also connected.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 161Application Manual

Page 168: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-7FB70959-1A66-44B0-BA48-98A2DA5EA90F V1 EN

Figure 93: Trip circuit supervision

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

The fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 detects failures in voltage measurementcircuits. Failures, such as an open miniature circuit breaker, are detected and thealarm is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Failures in current measuring circuits are detected by CCRDIF. When a failure isdetected, blocking signal is activated in current protection functions that aremeasuring calculated sequence component currents, and unnecessary operation canbe avoided. The alarm signal is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

162 REF615Application Manual

Page 169: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.11.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

GUID-7BCB289E-DD3D-4DC3-B95A-C836E336A7DC V1 EN

Figure 94: Synchrocheck

The main purpose of the synchronism and energizing check (SECRSYN) is toprovide control over the closing of the circuit breakers in power networks toprevent the closing if the conditions for synchronism are not detected. Theenergizing function allows closing, for example, when one side of the breaker is dead.

SECRSYN measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to setconditions. When all the measured quantities are within set limits, the outputSYNC_OK is activated for allowing closing or closing the circuit breaker. TheSYNC_OK output signal of SECRSYN is connected to ENA_CLOSE input ofCBXCBR through control logic.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 163Application Manual

Page 170: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-22CD6BDE-5E33-4637-BB4E-D6EA73D782F4 V1 EN

Figure 95: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breakerfrom local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binaryinput can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

164 REF615Application Manual

Page 171: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-F33E9B27-93E1-4AE0-9839-A27D76B9A724 V2 EN

Figure 96: Circuit breaker control

There are two types of disconnector and earthing switch blocks available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration logic. If controllable operation is preferred, the controllabletype of disconnector and earthing switch blocks can be used instead of the statusonly type. The connection and configuration of the control blocks can be doneusing PCM600.

The binary inputs 5 and 6 of the additional card X110 are used for busbardisconnector (DCSXSWI1) or circuit-breaker truck position indication.

Table 56: Device positions indicated by binary inputs 5 and 6

Primary device position Input to be energized Input 5 (X110:8-9) Input 6 (X110:10-9)

Busbar disconnector closed x

Busbar disconnector open x

Circuit breaker truck in service position x

Circuit breaker truck in test position x

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 165Application Manual

Page 172: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The binary inputs 7 and 8 (X110:11-13) are designed for the position indication ofthe line-side earth switch.

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination ofthe disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position statuses and the statusesof the master trip logics and gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging.The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck isdefinitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, togetherwith the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enablesignal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation is alwaysenabled. The auto-recloser close command signals are directly connected to theoutput contact PO1 (X100:6-7).

The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing ofthe circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position, despite ofthe interlocking conditions being active when the circuit breaker truck is closed inservice position.

If the ENA_CLOSE and BLK_CLOSE signals are completelyremoved from the breaker control function block CBXCBR withPCM600, the function assumes that the breaker close commandsare allowed continuously.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

166 REF615Application Manual

Page 173: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TPGAPC1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 +

+

X100

10

1112

13

14

COMMON ALARM / INDICATION 1 & 2

Start Indication

Operate Indication

SO1

SO2

PHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-start

EFLPTOC1-start

OR

EFLPTOC2-startEFHPTOC1-startEFIPTOC1-start

ROVPTOV1-start

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-start

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

EFLPTOC1-operate

OR

EFLPTOC2-operateEFHPTOC1-operateEFIPTOC1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

+

+

X110

17

1918

20

22

Over Current

Operate Alarm

Earth Fault

Operate Alarm

SO2

SO3

PHIPTOC1-operate

EFLPTOC1-operate

EFIPTOC1-operate OR

EFLPTOC2-operateEFHPTOC1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ORTPGAPC2

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

21

PHPTOV1-startPHPTOV2-startPHPTOV3-startPHPTUV1-startPHPTUV2-startPHPTUV3-start

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

+ 23

24

TPGAPC3

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

SO4

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

OR

Voltage

Protection

Operate Alarm

PHLPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC1-operatePHHPTOC2-operate

FRPFRQ1-start

FRPFRQ3-startFRPFRQ2-start

FRPFRQ1-operate

FRPFRQ3-operateFRPFRQ2-operate

FRPFRQ1-operate

FRPFRQ3-operateFRPFRQ2-operate

PHLPTOC1-startPHHPTOC1-startPHHPTOC2-start

GUID-A4229C25-A92A-46A4-AAFB-1E39530E1E36 V2 EN

Figure 97: Alarm indication

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) supervises the circuitbreaker status based on the binary input information connected and measured

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 167Application Manual

Page 174: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

current levels. The function introduces various supervision methods. Thecorresponding supervision alarm signals are routed to LED 8.

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100:13-14)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the overcurrent protection function SO2

(X110:17-19)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the earth-fault protection function SO3

(X110:20-22)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the voltage or frequency protection function

SO4 (X110:23-24)

TPGAPC 1...3 are timers used for setting the minimum pulse length for theoutputs. Four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) are available in the IED. Theremaining one not described in the functional diagram is available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

3.12 Standard configuration J

3.12.1 ApplicationsThe standard configuration for directional overcurrent and directional earth-faultprotection with phase-voltage based measurements, undervoltage and overvoltageprotection, and frequency protection and measurement functions is mainly intendedfor cable and overhead-line feeder applications in isolated or resonant-eartheddistribution networks. The configuration also includes additional options to selectearth-fault protection based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic based principle.

The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with defaultsettings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be furtheradapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs bymodifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

3.12.2 Functions

Table 57: Functions included in the standard configuration J

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage, instance 1 PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,low stage, instance 1 DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

168 REF615Application Manual

Page 175: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIThree-phase directional overcurrent protection,low stage, instance 2 DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,high stage DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> 67-2

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 1 DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage,instance 2 DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> 67N-2

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 1 EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 2 EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)

Admittance based earth-fault protection,instance 3 EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 1 WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 2 WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)

Wattmetric based earth-fault protection,instance 3 WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)

Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF 67NIEF

Harmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA 51NHA

Non-directional (cross-country) earth faultprotection, using calculated Io EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection,instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance1 PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance2 PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)

Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance3 PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 1 PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 2 PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)

Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 3 PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)

Positive-sequence undervoltage protection,instance 1 PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection,instance 1 NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 169Application Manual

Page 176: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIFrequency protection, instance 1 FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81 (1)

Frequency protection, instance 2 FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81 (2)

Frequency protection, instance 3 FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81 (3)

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68

Master trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)

Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)

Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)

Power quality

Current total demand distortion CMHAI1 PQM3I PQM3I

Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI1 PQM3U PQM3V

Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU PQMV

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB

Disconnector control, instance 1 DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC(1)

I <-> O DCC(1)

Disconnector control, instance 2 DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC(2)

I <-> O DCC(2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC

Disconnector position indication, instance 1 DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

Disconnector position indication, instance 2 DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

Disconnector position indication, instance 3 DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Earthing switch indication, instance 1 ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

Earthing switch indication, instance 2 ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79

Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN1 SYNC 25

Condition monitoring

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM

Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Current circuit supervision CCRDIF1 MCS 3I MCS 3I

Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 FUSEF 60

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -

Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

170 REF615Application Manual

Page 177: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIThree-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U 3U

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo Vn

Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0

Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 P, E P, E

Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f f

3.12.2.1 Default I/O connections

Table 58: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input Default usage Connector pinsX110-BI1 Busbar VT secondary MCB open X110-1,2

X110-BI2 Line VT secondary MCB open X110-3,4

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure indication X110-5,6

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication X110-7,6

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication X110-8,9

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (test position) indication X110-10,9

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication X110-11,12

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication X110-13,12

X120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage X120-1,2

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed indication X120-3,2

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open indication X120-4,2

X120-BI4 Lock-out reset X120-5,6

Table 59: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary output Default usage Connector pinsX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker X100-6,7

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker X100-8,9

X100-SO1 General start indication X100-10,11,(12)

X100-SO2 General operate indication X100-13,14

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1 X100-15-19

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 X100-20-24

X110-SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking X110-14,15

X110-SO2 Overcurrent operate alarm X110-17,18

X110-SO3 Earth fault operate alarm X110-20,21

X110-SO4 Voltage and frequency protection operate alarm X110-23,24

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 171Application Manual

Page 178: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 60: Default connections for LEDs

LED Default usage1 Overcurrent protection operated

2 Earth-fault protection operated

3 Combined protection operated indication

4 Synchronism or energizing check OK

5 Thermal overload protection operated

6 Circuit-breaker failure protection backup protection operated

7 Disturbance recorder triggered

8 CB condition monitoring

9 Supervision alarm

10 Arc fault detected

11 Autoreclose in progress

3.12.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 61: Default analog channel selection and text settings

Channel Selection and text1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 Uo

6 U1

7 U2

8 U3

9 U1B

10 -

11 -

12 -

Additionally, all the digital inputs that are connected by default are also enabledwith the setting. Default triggering settings are selected depending on theconnected input signal type. Typically all protection START signals are selected totrigger the disturbance recorded by default.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

172 REF615Application Manual

Page 179: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.12.3 Functional diagramsThe functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements, if necessary.

The analog channels have fixed connections towards the different function blocksinside the IED’s standard configuration. Exceptions from this rule are the 12analog channels available for the disturbance recorder function. These channels arefreely selectable and a part of the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.

The analog channels are assigned to different functions. The common signalmarked with 3I represents the three phase currents and 3U the three phase voltages.The signal marked with Io represents the measured residual current via a corebalance current transformer. The signal marked with Uo represents the measuredresidual voltage via open-delta connected voltage transformers.

The EFHPTOC protection function block for double (cross-country) earth-faultsuses the calculated residual current originating from the measured phase currents.

3.12.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED’s protection functionality in detail, andthe factory-set default connections.

Four overcurrent stages are available for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.Three of them include directional functionality (DPHxPDOC). The non-directionalinstantaneous stage (PHIPTOC1) can be blocked by energizing the binary input 1(X120:1-2). Two negative-sequence overcurrent stages (NSPTOC1 andNSPTOC2) are available for phase unbalance protection. The inrush detectionblock’s (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking the function ormultiplying the active settings for any of the shown protection function blocks.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 173Application Manual

Page 180: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-F0BE506C-0A96-4AA2-AC55-FFD9BCD23951 V2 EN

Figure 98: Directional overcurrent protection and inrush indication

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and to the alarm LEDs. TheLED 1 is used for overcurrent and the LED 3 for negative-sequence overcurrentprotection operate indication. The LED 3 is also used for phase discontinuityprotection operate indication and for voltage protection indication.

The upstream blocking from the start of the directional overcurrent second lowstage (DPHLPDOC2) is connected to the output SO1 (X110:14-16). This output isused for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage ofthe IED at the infeeding bay.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

174 REF615Application Manual

Page 181: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

DEFLPDEF1

I0> -> (1)

67N-1 (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2

I0> -> (2)

67N-1 (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1

I0>> ->

67N-1I0

U0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE1

P0> -> (1)

32N (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE2

P0> -> (2)

32N (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

WPWDE3

P0> -> (3)

32N (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RCA_CTL

START

OPERATE

OR

INTRPTEF1

I0 >

67NIEFI0

U0

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

BLK_EF

EFHPTOC1

I0>>

51N-2I0

BLOCK

ENA_MULT

START

OPERATE

Calculated Io

LED2 (EF OPERATE)

CCRDIF_FAIL

ROV-operate

EFPADM1

Y0> -> (1)

21YN (1)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM2

Y0> -> (2)

21YN (2)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

EFPADM3

Y0> -> (3)

21YN (3)I0

U0

BLOCK

RELEASE

START

OPERATE

HAEFPTOC1

I0>HA

51NHAI0

I_REF_RES

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

DOUBLE (CROSS-COUNTRY)

EARTH-FAULT PROTECTION

DIRECTIONAL EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

INTERMITTENT EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION

WATTMETRIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

ADMITTANCE EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

HARMONIC EARTH-FAULT

PROTECTION (Optional)

GUID-E23D63E4-3409-425F-820C-E875F5A1EE2C V1 EN

Figure 99: Directional earth-fault protection

Three stages are offered for directional earth-fault protection. According to theorder code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based onconventional directional earth-fault (DEFxPDEF) only or alternatively togetherwith admittance criteria (EFPADM) or wattmetric earth-fault protection (WPWDE)or harmonic based earth-fault protection (HAEFPTOC). In addition, there is adedicated protection stage (INTRPTEF) either for transient-based earth-faultprotection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block (EFHPTOC) protectsagainst double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated networks. This

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 175Application Manual

Page 182: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

protection function uses the calculated residual current originating from the phasecurrents.

All operate signals are connected to the Master Trip and also to the alarm LED 2.

DPHHPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operate

PHIPTOC1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

X120_BI2 (CB Closed)

+

PO2

8

9

X100

LED6 (CBFP OPERATE)

CBFP trip to

upstream breaker

CCBRBRF1

3I>/Io -> BF

51BF/51NBF3I

Io

START

POSCLOSE

CB_FAULT

BLOCK

TRRET

TRBU

CB_FAULT_AL

PDNSTOC1

I2 / I1

46PD3I

BLOCK

START

OPERATE

T1PTTR1

3 >

49F3I

BLK_OPR

ENA_MULT

OPERATE

ALARM

BLK_CLOSE

START

THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

PHASE DISCONTINUITY PROTECTION

BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

LED5 (OVERLOAD ALARM)

LED4 (NPS/PD OPERATE)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

CCRDIF_FAIL

EFPADM2-operate

EFPADM3-operate

GUID-5F0B30AD-0B3F-4B6D-BFAC-7209FA9DAACD V3 EN

Figure 100: Phase discontinuity, thermal overload and circuit breaker failureprotection

The phase discontinuity protection (PDNSPTOC1) protects for interruptions in thenormal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. Theoperate signal of the phase discontinuity protection is connected to the Master Tripand also to an alarm LED and the disturbance recorder. The thermal overloadprotection (T1PTTR1) provides indication on overload situations. The operatesignal of the phase discontinuity protection is connected to the Master Trip andalso to an alarm LED. The LED 3 is used for the phase discontinuity protectionoperate indication, the same as for negative-sequence overcurrent protectionoperate indication, and the LED 5 is used for the thermal overload protection alarmindication.

The breaker-failure protection (CCBRBRF1) is initiated via the start input by anumber of different protection stages in the IED. The breaker failure protectionfunction offers different operating modes associated with the circuit breakerposition and the measured phase- and residual currents. The breaker failureprotection has two operating outputs: TRRET and TRBU. The TRRET operateoutput is used for retripping its own breaker through the Master Trip 2. The TRBUoutput is used to give a back-up trip to the breaker feeding upstream. For this

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

176 REF615Application Manual

Page 183: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the output PO2 (X100:8-9). The LED 6 is used for back-up (TRBU) operate indication.

EFPADM2-operate

DPHHPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operate

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operate

DEFHPDEF1-operate

OR

ARC PROTECTION (Optional)

LED10 (ARC PROTECTION)

WPWDE2-operate

WPWDE3-operateEFPADM3-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

AUTORECLOSING (Optional)

OR

PDNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operateCBXCBR1-selectedINTRPTEF1-operate

OR

OR

LED11 (AR IN PROGRESS)

X110

6

7

X120_BI3 (CB Open)

BI4 (CB Spring Charged)

DARREC1

0 -> 1

79INIT_1

INIT_2

INIT_3

INIT_4

INIT_5

INIT_6

DEL_INIT_2

DEL_INIT_3

DEL_INIT_4

BLK_RECL_T

BLK_RCLM_T

BLK_THERM

CB_POS

CB_READY

INC_SHOTP

INHIBIT_RECL

RECL_ON

SYNC

OPEN_CB

CLOSE_CB

CMD_WAIT

INPRO

LOCKED

PROT_CRD

UNSUC_RECL

AR_ON

READY

ARCSARC1

ARC (1)

50L/50NL (1)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC2

ARC (2)

50L/50NL (2)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

ARCSARC3

ARC (3)

50L/50NL (3)3I

Io

BLOCK

REM_FLT_ARC

OPR_MODE

OPERATE

ARC_FLT_DET

SECRSYN-sync_ok

GUID-314E2B2B-3BF1-4351-982E-E881178D64CE V1 EN

Figure 101: Arc protection

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 177Application Manual

Page 184: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

ARC protection (ARCSARC1...3) and autorreclosing (DARREC1) are included asoptional functions.

The ARC protection offers individual function blocks for three ARC sensors thatcan be connected to the IED. Each ARC protection function block has two differentoperation modes, with or without the phase and residual current check. The operatesignals from the ARC protection function blocks are connected to the Master Tripand also to the alarm LED 10 as a common operate indication.

The autorecloser is configured to be initiated by operate signals from a number ofprotection stages through the INIT1...5 inputs. It is possible to create individualautoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclose function can be blocked with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, some selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclose function via the CBXCBR-selected signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. In the configuration, this signal is not connectedto any of the binary inputs. As a result, the function assumes that the breaker isavailable all the time.

The autoreclose sequence in progress indication is connected to the alarm LED 11.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

178 REF615Application Manual

Page 185: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-BCEB1C2E-BC64-4E79-8329-A5D9FCD7AB2F V2 EN

Figure 102: Overvoltage and undervoltage protection

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages (PHxPTOV and PHxPTUV)protect against abnormal phase voltage conditions. The voltage function operationis connected to the alarm LED 3. A failure in the voltage measuring circuit isdetected by the fuse failure function, and the activation is connected toundervoltage protection functions to avoid faulty undervoltage tripping.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 179Application Manual

Page 186: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

GUID-A77D0608-E3F2-4D3D-8907-15034FC42D51 V2 EN

Figure 103: Positive-sequence undervoltage and negative-sequenceovervoltage protection

Positive-sequence undervoltage (PSPTUV) and negative-sequence overvoltage(NSPTOV) protection functions enable voltage-based unbalance protection. Theoperation signals of the voltage-sequence functions are connected to the alarmLED 3, which is a combined voltage protection alarm LED.

GUID-54404411-CD8E-4277-A0A1-80B31CBD45EC V2 EN

Figure 104: Residual overvoltage protection

The residual overvoltage protection (ROVPTOV) provides earth fault protection bydetecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a non-selective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.The operation signal is connected to the alarm LED 2.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

180 REF615Application Manual

Page 187: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The selectable underfrequency or overfrequency protection (FRPFRQ) preventsdamage to network components under unwanted frequency conditions. Thefunction contains a selectable rate of change of the frequency (gradient) protectionto detect an increase or decrease in the fast power system frequency at an earlystage. This can be used as an early indication of a disturbance in the system. Theoperation signal is connected to the alarm LED 3.

3.12.3.2 Functional diagram for disturbance recorder and trip circuit supervision

LED7 (DR TRIGGERING)

OR

DPHLPDOC1-startDPHLPDOC2-startDPHHPDOC1-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

DEFLPDEF1-startEFPADM1-startWPWDE1-start

ORDEFLPDEF2-startEFPADM2-startWPWDE2-start

ORDEFHPDEF1-startEFPADM3-startWPWDE3-start

EFHPTOC1-startPDNSPTOC1-startT1PTTR1-startPHPTOV1-startPHPTOV2-startPHPTOV3-start

CCBRBRF1-trretCCBRBRF1-trbu

OR

EFHPTOC1-operatePDNSPTOC1-operate

T1PTTR1-operateINRPHAR1-blk2h

OR

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operate

NSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF1-operateDEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

ORWPWDE3-operate

OR

ORPHPTOV1-operate

WPWDE2-operateWPWDE1-operate

ORARCSARC1-arc_flt_detARCSARC2-arc_flt_detARCSARC3-arc_flt_det

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operateDARREC-inpro

BI 2 (CB Closed)BI 3 (CB Open)

SEQRFUF_3PHSEQRFUF_UCCRDIF_FAIL

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-startROVPTOV1-start

PHPTUV1-startPHPTUV2-startPHPTUV3-start

NSPTOV1-startPSPTUV1-start

PHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operate

PSPTUV1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operateNSPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV2-operateROVPTOV3-operate

OR

ORPHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

RDRE1

BI#1

BI#2

BI#3

BI#4

BI#5

BI#6

BI#7

BI#8

BI#9

BI#10

BI#11

BI#12

BI#13

BI#14

BI#15

BI#16

BI#17

BI#18

BI#19

BI#20

BI#21

BI#22

BI#23

BI#24

BI#25

BI#26

BI#27

BI#28

BI#29

BI#30

BI#31

BI#32

BI#33

BI#34

BI#35

BI#36

BI#37

BI#38

BI#39

BI#40

BI#41

BI#42

BI#43

BI#44

BI#45

BI#46

BI#47

BI#48

BI#49

BI#50

BI#51

BI#52

BI#53

BI#54

BI#55

BI#56

BI#57

TRIGGERED

SECRSYN-sync_okSECRSYN-cl_fail_al

SECRSYN-inpro

SECRSYN-cmd_fail_al

FRPFRQ1-startFRPFRQ2-startFRPFRQ3-start

DARREC-close-cbDARREC-unsuc-recl

OR

BI 1 (Blocking)

INTRPTEF1-operate

INTRPTEF1-operate

ORFRPFRQ1-operateFRPFRQ2-operateFRPFRQ3-operate

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

GUID-A43CDD30-D1E8-4E71-A6DF-C3BB34C8980F V1 EN

Figure 105: Disturbance recorder

All start and operate signals from the protection stages are routed either to triggerthe disturbance recorder or to be recorded by the disturbance recorder, depending

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 181Application Manual

Page 188: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected autorecloser, the ARCprotection signals and the three binary inputs from X120 are also connected.

GUID-4ECE78AD-FBD1-437D-9D94-FEF176F031B0 V1 EN

Figure 106: Trip circuit supervision

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for PO3(X100:15-19) and TCSSCBR2 for PO4 (X100:20-24). Both functions are blockedby the Master Trip (TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2) and the circuit breaker opensignal. The TCS alarm indication is connected to LED 9.

By default it is expected that there is no external resistor in thecircuit breaker tripping coil circuit connected parallel with circuitbreaker normally open auxiliary contact.

The fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 detects failures in voltage measurementcircuits. Failures, such as an open miniature circuit breaker, are detected and thealarm is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Failures in current measuring circuits are detected by CCRDIF. When a failure isdetected, blocking signal is activated in current protection functions that aremeasuring calculated sequence component currents, and unnecessary operation canbe avoided. The alarm signal is connected to the alarm LED 9.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

182 REF615Application Manual

Page 189: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

3.12.3.3 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

+

X100

16

17

15

18

OR

MASTER TRIP #1

Open CB /

trip coil 1PO3

TRPPTRC1

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

TRPPTRC2

BLOCK

OPERATE

RST_LKOUT

TRIP

CL_LKOUT

With lock-out modeselection

DARREC-open cbCBXCBR1-exe_op

MASTER TRIP #2

TCS1

OR

19

+

X100

22

21

23

PO4

TCS2 24

20

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

INTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

Open CB /

trip coil 2

BI 4 (Lock-out reset)

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

INTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

OR

CCBRBRF1-trret

FRPFRQ1-operateFRPFRQ2-operateFRPFRQ3-operate

FRPFRQ1-operateFRPFRQ2-operateFRPFRQ3-operate

GUID-50C1054D-5894-4058-AC25-37F6D984D510 V1 EN

Figure 107: Master trip

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip outputcontacts PO3 (X100:15-19) and PO4 (X100:20-24) via the corresponding MasterTrips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. Open control commands to the circuit breaker

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 183Application Manual

Page 190: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

from local or remote CBXCBR1-exe_op or from the auto-recloser DARREC1-open_cb are connected directly to the output PO3 (X100:15-19).

TRPPTRC1 and 2 provide the lockout/latching function, event generation and thetrip signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, one binaryinput can be reassigned to the RST_LKOUT input of the Master Trip to enableexternal reset with a push button.

GUID-C2B1BF1B-DE6E-4905-AE22-4330C9B22DF6 V1 EN

Figure 108: Circuit breaker control

There are two types of disconnector and earthing switch blocks available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration logic. If controllable operation is preferred, the controllabletype of disconnector and earthing switch blocks can be used instead of the statusonly type. The connection and configuration of the control blocks can be doneusing PCM600.

The binary inputs 5 and 6 of the additional card X110 are used for busbardisconnector (DCSXSWI1) or circuit-breaker truck position indication.

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

184 REF615Application Manual

Page 191: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 62: Device positions indicated by binary inputs 5 and 6

Primary device position Input to be energized Input 5 (X110:8-9) Input 6 (X110:10-9)

Busbar disconnector closed x

Busbar disconnector open x

Circuit breaker truck in service position x

Circuit breaker truck in test position x

The binary inputs 7 and 8 (X110:11-13) are designed for the position indication ofthe line-side earth switch.

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination ofthe disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position statuses and the statusesof the master trip logics and gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging.The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck isdefinitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, togetherwith the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enablesignal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation is alwaysenabled. The auto-recloser close command signals are directly connected to theoutput contact PO1 (X100:6-7).

The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing ofthe circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position, despite ofthe interlocking conditions being active when the circuit breaker truck is closed inservice position.

If the ENA_CLOSE and BLK_CLOSE signals are completelyremoved from the breaker control function block CBXCBR withPCM600, the function assumes that the breaker close commandsare allowed continuously.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 185Application Manual

Page 192: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

TPGAPC1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 +

+

X100

10

1112

13

14

COMMON ALARM / INDICATION 1 & 2

Start Indication

Operate Indication

SO1

SO2

DPHLPDOC1-startDPHLPDOC2-startDPHHPDOC1-startPHIPTOC1-startNSPTOC1-startNSPTOC2-start

PDNSPTOC1-start

DEFLPDEF1-start

EFHPTOC1-start

OR

DEFLPDEF2-startDEFHPDEF1-start

EFPADM1-startEFPADM2-startEFPADM3-start

INTRPTEF1-start

ROVPTOV1-start

ROVPTOV3-startROVPTOV2-start

WPWDE1-startWPWDE2-startWPWDE3-start

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operatePHIPTOC1-operateNSPTOC1-operateNSPTOC2-operate

PDNSPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operate

OR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operate

EFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operate

INTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ARCSARC1-operateARCSARC2-operateARCSARC3-operate

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

+

+

X110

17

1918

20

22

Over Current

Operate Alarm

Earth Fault

Operate Alarm

SO2

SO3

PHIPTOC1-operate

DEFLPDEF1-operate

EFHPTOC1-operateOR

DEFLPDEF2-operateDEFHPDEF1-operateEFPADM1-operateEFPADM2-operateEFPADM3-operateINTRPTEF1-operate

ROVPTOV1-operate

ROVPTOV3-operateROVPTOV2-operate

ORTPGAPC2

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

WPWDE1-operateWPWDE2-operateWPWDE3-operate

21

PHPTOV1-startPHPTOV2-startPHPTOV3-startPSPTUV1-startNSPTOV1-startPHPTUV1-startPHPTUV2-startPHPTUV3-start

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operatePSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operatePHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

+ 23

24

TPGAPC3

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

SO4

PHPTOV1-operatePHPTOV2-operatePHPTOV3-operate

PSPTUV1-operateNSPTOV1-operate

PHPTUV1-operatePHPTUV2-operatePHPTUV3-operate

OR

Voltage

Protection

Operate Alarm

DPHLPDOC1-operateDPHLPDOC2-operateDPHHPDOC1-operate

FRPFRQ1-start

FRPFRQ3-startFRPFRQ2-start

FRPFRQ1-operate

FRPFRQ3-operateFRPFRQ2-operate

FRPFRQ1-operate

FRPFRQ3-operateFRPFRQ2-operate

GUID-3EDD7516-25EC-4D20-BBB0-F8BFA8C61750 V1 EN

Figure 109: Alarm indication

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) supervises the circuitbreaker status based on the binary input information connected and measured

Section 3 1MRS756378 KREF615 standard configurations

186 REF615Application Manual

Page 193: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

current levels. The function introduces various supervision methods. Thecorresponding supervision alarm signals are routed to LED 8.

The signal outputs from the IED are connected to give dedicated information on:

• Start of any protection function SO1 (X100:10-12)• Operation (trip) of any protection function SO2 (X100:13-14)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the overcurrent protection function SO2

(X110:17-19)• Operation (trip) of any stage of the earth-fault protection function SO3

(X110:20-22)

TPGAPC 1...3 are timers used for setting the minimum pulse length for theoutputs. Four generic timers (TPGAPC1..4) are available in the IED. Theremaining one not described in the functional diagram is available in PCM600 forconnection where applicable.

3.12.3.4 Functional diagrams for power quality

The standard configuration offers a set of power quality functions. The totaldemand distortion of current can be supervised by CMHAI function, andcorrespondingly the total harmonics distortion of voltage can be supervised byVMHAI. The configuration also offers a short-duration voltage variationmeasurement function PHQVVR. This can be used for detecting voltage sags,swells and interruptions per-phase.

The power quality functions are not connected in the standard configuration bydefault. Depending on the application, the needed logic connections can be madeby PCM600.

1MRS756378 K Section 3REF615 standard configurations

REF615 187Application Manual

Page 194: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

188

Page 195: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Section 4 Requirements for measurementtransformers

4.1 Current transformers

4.1.1 Current transformer requirements for non-directionalovercurrent protectionFor reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to bechosen carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT mayendanger the operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However,when the CT is correctly selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can beenabled.

The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on thenetwork fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CTburden. The protection settings of the IED should be defined in accordance withthe CT performance as well as other factors.

4.1.1.1 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor

The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primarycurrent to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformerof type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. Forprotective current transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highestpermissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary currentprescribed for the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaningprotection).

Table 63: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers

Accuracy class Current error atrated primarycurrent (%)

Phase displacement at rated primarycurrent

Composite error atrated accuracy limitprimary current (%)minutes centiradians

5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5

10P ±3 - - 10

The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrentprotection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also ifthere are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering,power metering, and so on) of the IED.

1MRS756378 K Section 4Requirements for measurement transformers

REF615 189Application Manual

Page 196: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault currentmagnitude at which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, thesecondary current of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on theperformance of the protection IED.

In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracylimit factor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and theactual CT burden.

The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:

F FS S

S Sa n

in n

in

≈ ×

+

+

A071141 V1 EN

Fn the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden Sn

Sin the internal secondary burden of the CT

S the actual external burden

4.1.1.2 Non-directional overcurrent protection

The current transformer selectionNon-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on theaccuracy class or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however,recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.

The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermaland dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the IED is not exceeded.This is always fulfilled when

I1n > Ikmax / 100,

Ikmax is the highest fault current.

The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of theIED. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal primary currentcan be used than given by the formula.

Recommended start current settingsIf Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is tooperate, the start current should be set using the formula:

Current start value < 0.7 x (Ikmin / I1n)

I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.

Section 4 1MRS756378 KRequirements for measurement transformers

190 REF615Application Manual

Page 197: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection IED inaccuracy, currenttransformer errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.

The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of thehigh set stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused bythe CT saturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting isnoticeably lower than Fa.

When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CTdoes not need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simplyaccording to the formula.

Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformersThe saturation of CT may cause a delayed IED operation. To ensure the timeselectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the operate times ofsuccessive IEDs.

With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay thatis as long as the time the constant of the DC component of the fault current, whenthe current is only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on theaccuracy limit factor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, andon the operate time setting.

With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered asbeing as long as the time constant of the DC component.

With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, theAC component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times thestarting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:

Fa > 20*Current start value / I1n

The Current start value is the primary pickup current setting of the IED.

4.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection

The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection isimplemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.

1MRS756378 K Section 4Requirements for measurement transformers

REF615 191Application Manual

Page 198: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

A071142 V1 EN

Figure 110: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection

The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phaseshort circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT iscalculated to be 59.

The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice thenominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective withthe next IED (not visible in the figure above). The settings for the high-set stageand instantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with thedownstream protection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined sothat the IED operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate withthe maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in the figure above.

For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>)in this example is 3 500 A (5.83 x I2n). For the CT characteristics point of view, thecriteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also theIED setting is considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burdencould have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.

Section 4 1MRS756378 KRequirements for measurement transformers

192 REF615Application Manual

Page 199: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Section 5 IED physical connections

5.1 Inputs

5.1.1 Energizing inputs

5.1.1.1 Phase currents

The IED can also be used in single or two-phase applications byleaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied. However, at leastterminals X120/7-8 must be connected.

Table 64: Phase current inputs included in configurations A, B, C, D, E, F, H and J

Terminal DescriptionX120-7, 8 IL1

X120-9, 10 IL2

X120-11, 12 IL3

5.1.1.2 Residual current

Table 65: Residual current input included in configurations A, B, C, D, E, F, H and J

Terminal DescriptionX120-13, 14 Io

Table 66: Residual current input included in configuration G

Terminal DescriptionX130–1, 2 Io

5.1.1.3 Phase voltages

Table 67: Phase voltage input included in configurations E, F, H and J

Terminal DescriptionX130-11, 12 U1

X130-13, 14 U2

X130-15, 16 U3

1MRS756378 K Section 5IED physical connections

REF615 193Application Manual

Page 200: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Table 68: Reference voltage input for SECRSYN1 included in configurations H and J

Terminal DescriptionX130-9, 10 U12B

5.1.1.4 Residual voltage

Table 69: Additional residual voltage input included in configurations A and B

Terminal DescriptionX120-5, 6 Uo

Table 70: Additional residual voltage input included in configurations E, F, H and J

Terminal DescriptionX130-17, 18 Uo

5.1.1.5 Sensor inputs

Table 71: Combi sensor inputs included in configuration G

Terminal DescriptionX131 IL1

U1

X132 IL2U2

X133 IL3U3

5.1.2 Auxiliary supply voltage inputThe auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X100/1-2. At DCsupply, the positive lead is connected to terminal X100-1. The permitted auxiliaryvoltage range (AC/DC or DC) is marked on the top of the LHMI of the IED.

Table 72: Auxiliary voltage supply

Terminal DescriptionX100-1 + Input

X100-2 - Input

5.1.3 Binary inputsThe binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, tounlatch output contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control ofIED settings.

Section 5 1MRS756378 KIED physical connections

194 REF615Application Manual

Page 201: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Binary inputs of slot X110 are available with configurations B, D, E, F, G, H and J.

Table 73: Binary input terminals X110-1...13

Terminal DescriptionX110-1 BI1, +

X110-2 BI1, -

X110-3 BI2, +

X110-4 BI2, -

X110-5 BI3, +

X110-6 BI3, -

X110-6 BI4, -

X110-7 BI4, +

X110-8 BI5, +

X110-9 BI5, -

X110-9 BI6, -

X110-10 BI6, +

X110-11 BI7, +

X110-12 BI7, -

X110-12 BI8, -

X110-13 BI8, +

Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configurations C, D, E, F, H and J.

Table 74: Binary input terminals X120-1...6

Terminal DescriptionX120-1 BI1, +

X120-2 BI1, -

X120-3 BI2, +

X120-2 BI2, -

X120-4 BI3, +

X120-2 BI3, -

X120-5 BI4, +

X120-6 BI4, -

Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configurations A and B.

Table 75: Binary input terminals X120-1...4

Terminal DescriptionX120-1 BI1, +

X120-2 BI1, -

X120-3 BI2, +

Table continues on next page

1MRS756378 K Section 5IED physical connections

REF615 195Application Manual

Page 202: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Terminal DescriptionX120-2 BI2, -

X120-4 BI3, +

X120-2 BI3, -

Binary inputs of slot X130 are optional for configurations B and D.

Table 76: Binary input terminals X130-1...9

Terminal DescriptionX130-1 BI1, +

X130-2 BI1, -

X130-2 BI2, -

X130-3 BI2, +

X130-4 BI3, +

X130-5 BI3, -

X130-5 BI4, -

X130-6 BI4, +

X130-7 BI5, +

X130-8 BI5, -

X130-8 BI6, -

X130-9 BI6, +

Binary inputs of slot X130 are available with configurations E, F, H and J.

Table 77: Binary input terminals X130-1...8

Terminal DescriptionX130-1 BI1, +

X130-2 BI1, -

X130-3 BI2, +

X130-4 BI2, -

X130-5 BI3, +

X130-6 BI3, -

X130-7 BI4, +

X130-8 BI4, -

5.1.4 Optional light sensor inputsIf the IED is provided with the optional communication module with light sensorinputs, the pre-manufactured lens-sensor fibres are connected to inputs X13, X14and X15, see the terminal diagrams.For further information, see arc protection.

Section 5 1MRS756378 KIED physical connections

196 REF615Application Manual

Page 203: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

The IED is provided with connection sockets X13, X14 and X15only if the optional communication module with light sensor inputshas been installed. If the arc protection option is selected whenordering an IED, the light sensor inputs are included in thecommunication module.

Table 78: Light sensor input connectors

Terminal DescriptionX13 Input Light sensor 1

X14 Input Light sensor 2

X15 Input Light sensor 3

5.2 Outputs

5.2.1 Outputs for tripping and controllingOutput contacts PO1, PO2, PO3 and PO4 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable ofcontrolling most circuit breakers. On delivery from the factory, the trip signalsfrom all the protection stages are routed to PO3 and PO4.

Table 79: Output contacts

Terminal DescriptionX100-6 PO1, NO

X100-7 PO1, NO

X100-8 PO2, NO

X100-9 PO2, NO

X100-15 PO3, NO (TCS resistor)

X100-16 PO3, NO

X100-17 PO3, NO

X100-18 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO

X100-19 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO

X100-20 PO4, NO (TCS resistor)

X100-21 PO4, NO

X100-22 PO4, NO

X100-23 PO4 (TCS2 input), NO

X100-24 PO4 (TCS2 input), NO

5.2.2 Outputs for signallingOutput contacts SO1 and SO2 in slot X100 or SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in slotX110 or SO1, SO2 and SO3 in slot X130 (optional) can be used for signalling on

1MRS756378 K Section 5IED physical connections

REF615 197Application Manual

Page 204: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

start and tripping of the IED. On delivery from the factory, the start and alarmsignals from all the protection stages are routed to signalling outputs.

Table 80: Output contacts X100-10...14

Terminal DescriptionX100-10 SO1, common

X100-11 SO1, NC

X100-12 SO1, NO

X100-13 SO2, NO

X100-14 SO2, NO

Output contacts of slot X110 are available with configurations B, D, E, F, G, H andJ.

Table 81: Output contacts X110-14...24

Terminal DescriptionX110-14 SO1, common

X110-15 SO1, NO

X110-16 SO1, NC

X110-17 SO2, common

X110-18 SO2, NO

X110-19 SO2, NC

X110-20 SO3, common

X110-21 SO3, NO

X110-22 SO3, NC

X110-23 SO4, common

X110-24 SO4, NO

Output contacts of slot X130 are available in the optional BIO module (BIOB02A).

Output contacts of slot X130 are optional for configurations B and D.

Table 82: Output contacts X130-10...18

Terminal DescriptionX130-10 SO1, common

X130-11 SO1, NO

X130-12 SO1, NC

X130-13 SO2, common

X130-14 SO2, NO

X130-15 SO2, NC

X130-16 SO3, common

X130-17 SO3, NO

X130-18 SO3, NC

Section 5 1MRS756378 KIED physical connections

198 REF615Application Manual

Page 205: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

5.2.3 IRFThe IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system ofthe protection IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized andthe contact is closed (X100/3-5). When a fault is detected by the self-supervisionsystem or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the output contact drops off and thecontact closes (X100/3-4).

Table 83: IRF contact

Terminal DescriptionX100-3 IRF, common

X100-4 Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected

X100-5 Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected

1MRS756378 K Section 5IED physical connections

REF615 199Application Manual

Page 206: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

200

Page 207: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Section 6 Glossary

615 series Series of numerical IEDs for low-end protection andsupervision applications of utility substations, andindustrial switchgear and equipment

ANSI American National Standards InstituteASCII American Standard Code for Information InterchangeBI Binary inputBI/O Binary input/outputBO Binary outputCB Circuit breakerCT Current transformerDNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed by

Westronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownershipof the protocol and assumes responsibility for itsevolution.

DPC Double-point controlEMC Electromagnetic compatibilityEthernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based

computer networking technologies into a LANFIFO First in, first outGOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation EventHMI Human-machine interfaceHW HardwareI/O Input/outputIEC International Electrotechnical CommissionIEC 60870-5-103 1. Communication standard for protective equipment

2. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-pointcommunication

IEC 61850 International standard for substation communicationand modeling

IEC 61850-8-1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850standard series

IED Intelligent electronic deviceIET600 Integrated Engineering Toolbox in PCM600

1MRS756378 K Section 6Glossary

REF615 201Application Manual

Page 208: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

IP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separatedby periods. Each server connected to the Internet isassigned a unique IP address that specifies thelocation for the TCP/IP protocol.

IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code format BLAN Local area networkLC Connector type for glass fibre cableLCD Liquid crystal displayLED Light-emitting diodeLHMI Local human-machine interfaceModbus A serial communication protocol developed by the

Modicon company in 1979. Originally used forcommunication in PLCs and RTU devices.

Modbus TCP/IP Modbus RTU protocol which uses TCP/IP and Ethernetto carry data between devices

PCM600 Protection and Control IED ManagerPO Power outputRCA Also known as MTA or base angle. Characteristic angle.RIO600 Remote I/O unitRJ-45 Galvanic connector typeRS-232 Serial interface standardRS-485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocolRTU Remote terminal unitSingle-linediagram

Simplified notation for representing a three-phasepower system. Instead of representing each of threephases with a separate line or terminal, only oneconductor is represented.

SLD Single-line diagramSO Signal outputTCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolTCS Trip-circuit supervisionWAN Wide area networkWHMI Web human-machine interface

Section 6 1MRS756378 KGlossary

202 REF615Application Manual

Page 209: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

203

Page 210: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk
Page 211: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk
Page 212: FeederProtectionControl ABB AppManual Ref615 Appl 756378 Enk

Contact us

ABB OyDistribution AutomationP.O. Box 699FI-65101 VAASA, FinlandPhone +358 10 22 11Fax +358 10 22 41094

www.abb.com/substationautomation

1MR

S75

6378

Cop

yrig

ht 2

012

AB

B. A

ll rig

hts

rese

rved

.